A Foodcentric Life

  • Best Summer Recipes
  • Meet Chef Sally
  • Recipe Index
  • Subscribe
menu icon
go to homepage
  • Best Summer Recipes
  • Meet Chef Sally
  • Recipe Index
  • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
  • search icon
    Homepage link
    • Best Summer Recipes
    • Meet Chef Sally
    • Recipe Index
    • Subscribe
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • LinkedIn
    • Pinterest
  • ×
    Home » Recipes

    Fresh Green Beans Almondine Recipe

    04/08/2023 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    A bowl of bright green beans almondine with toasted buttered almonds.

    Green Beans Almondine is a classic French side dish made with tender green beans and buttery toasted almonds. It sounds elegant, but it's surprisingly easy to make and comes together in about 30 minutes. For the best texture, use haricots verts, the slender French variety of green beans. Serve it for weeknight dinners, holidays, or any meal that needs a simple vegetable side with a little extra crunch and flavor.

    Green beans almondine in a shallow oval bowl scattered with toasted almonds.

    A classic French dish, green beans almondine is a lighter, more elegant alternative to rich holiday favorites like green bean casserole. You may also see it spelled amandine or almandine, but no matter the name, it's an easy, flavorful way to serve green beans. It pairs beautifully with ham, pork tenderloin, roast chicken, or turkey, making it just as useful for weeknight dinners as it is for holidays and special occasions.

    Green Beans Almondine Recipe Snapshot

    • Simple ingredients - Fresh green beans, butter-toasted almonds, and a few basic seasonings create a classic, elegant side dish.
    • Make-ahead friendly - Prep the green beans and toast the almonds ahead, then finish the dish just before serving.
    • A lighter holiday side - A fresh, elegant alternative to rich green bean casserole.
    • Classic but elevated - Butter-toasted almonds turn everyday green beans into a side dish worthy of holidays and special dinners.

    For a delicious for green bean recipe for falls holidays, try Thanksgiving green beans recipe.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for green beans recipe in bowls on the counter.
    • Green beans - Look for haricots verts, the slender French green beans sometimes labeled French green beans or baby green beans. They're more tender and delicate than standard green beans and work especially well for almondine.
    • Almonds - Use raw sliced almonds so you can toast them in butter until golden and fragrant.
    • Shallot - Adds mild sweetness and savory depth without overpowering the beans.
    • Garlic - Adds savory flavor and aroma.
    • Butter - Use unsalted butter, ghee or clarified butter, or plant butter for a dairy-free version.
    • Olive oil - A small amount helps sauté the shallot and garlic and adds flavor.
    • Kosher salt - You'll need a generous amount for blanching the green beans so they're seasoned from the inside out.

    Please see recipe card for measurements.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • No haricots verts? Regular green beans work well too.
    • No sliced almonds? Use slivered almonds instead.
    • Try another nut or seed - Walnuts, pecans, pine nuts, or toasted pepitas all work nicely.
    • For a sweeter holiday version - Swap in chopped candied maple pecans for a festive finish.
    • Add fresh herbs - Finish with chopped Italian parsley or chives for extra freshness.

    Recipe Instructions

    Set Up:

    • Get a large pot of very salted water boiling to blanch green beans.
    • Set up an ice bath. Fill a medium bowl half full of ice cubes and add cold water.
    • Ready a plate or rimmed baking sheet with a clean kitchen towel or paper towels to drain the beans.

    While the water is coming to a boil, make the toasted almonds.

    Toast Almonds

    These buttery toasted almonds really make the green beans almondine the best!

    Melting butter in a stainless steel fry pan.
    1. Melt unsalted butter in a large frying pan over medium heat.
    Starting to toast almonds in butter on the stove top.
    1. Add the almonds and toast for 3-4 minutes, stirring. Don't walk away as nuts burn quickly. If you need to turn your heat down, do so. You want toasted almonds, not burned ones.
    Golden brown butter toasted almonds in the pan, finished.
    1. Finished browned butter toasted almonds ready to cool.
    Toasted almonds cooling on a sheet pan.
    1. Pour the almonds out of the hot pan onto a sheet pan or onto parchment paper and scatter a little salt over the top. Get them out of the hot pan so they do not over brown. Cool the almonds and keep them in the refrigerator in an airtight container. They keep for a month.

    Chef's Note: Blanching is a basic cooking method that par-cooks (or pre-cooks) vegetables to be finished at a later time. Blanching requires very salty boiling water; think of it like fast brining for vegetables. It locks in their flavor and sets color. You are not consuming all of the salt in the water, so don't worry. The water is drained off. Start with 1 tablespoon of kosher salt per quart of water. I use 5 tablespoons of coarse kosher sea salt for an almost-full 6 quart pot. It works!

    Blanching Green Beans

    Blanching green beans is a simple technique everyone should know.

    A small pot of boiling green beans on the stovetop.
    1. Trim the tops off any stems. Haricot vert usually come trimmed. Place green beans in the boiling, salted water (1 tablespoon of salt per quart of water) and cook for 4 minutes.
    Cooked green beans in an ice bath chilling.
    1. Immediately after cooking, plunge the blanched green beans into the ice water bath. This stops the cooking process and the green beans retain their bright green color. When green beans are cold (just a couple minutes), move them to drain on a kitchen towel.

    Saute Shallots

    Sautéing shallot in olive oil in a fry pan.
    1. Heat the olive oil in a frying pan or large skillet over medium heat and add the shallots. Saute until soft and tender, cooking time about 3 minutes. Add garlic and cook another 1 minute, stirring.
    Adding green beans to the shallots to heat up for serving.
    1. Add the green beans and turn to coat with flavor and warm up, about 5 minutes. Remove green beans to a shallow bowl or platter for serving and sprinkle (or toss) with the almonds.
    A bowl of bright green beans with toasted buttered almonds.

    Serving Suggestions

    Green beans almondine are traditionally served warm, but they're also delicious chilled or at room temperature, especially in warmer weather.

    For fall and holiday meals, add dried cranberries for a tart-sweet pop of color, or finish with crisp crumbled bacon for a richer variation. Serve alongside roast chicken, turkey, ham, pork tenderloin, or beef.

    For another green bean side dish, try this green bean salad with tomatoes and corn for summer.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is the difference between Amandine and Almondine?

    There is no real difference. Both terms refer to dishes finished with almonds, usually toasted. Amandine is the French culinary term, while almondine is the more common English spelling.

    What are the best green beans for green beans almondine?

    Haricots verts are ideal. These slender French green beans are more tender and delicate than standard green beans and cook quickly while keeping a crisp-tender texture.

    What can I add to green beans to make them taste better?

    Start by seasoning the cooking water well so the beans are flavorful from the inside out. After cooking, add butter or olive oil, salt and pepper, toasted almonds, crisp bacon, Parmesan, garlic breadcrumbs, sesame oil, or balsamic glaze. For more ideas, see my guide to dressing up basic green beans.

    More Great Vegetable Side Dishes

    For another easy and pretty green bean recipe try this one with pomegranate seeds.

    • roasted broccoli
      Roasted Broccoli with Parmesan and Lemon
    • Zucchini Casserole with Parmesan Crumb Topping
      Zucchini Casserole with Parmesan Crust
    • A bowl of burnished roasted Brussels sprouts glazed with Balsamic.
      Brussels Sprouts with Balsamic Vinegar
    • roast asparagus
      Oven RoastedAsparagus

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make green beans almondine, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. They really help other readers.s

    📖 Recipe

    Green Beans Almondine | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Green Beans Almondine

    Sally Cameron
    Tender French baby green beans (Haricot Vert), come packaged with the ends snipped off, ready to cook. You can use regular green beans and cut the tops of yourself. Top with crunchy toasted almonds. Great for every day, a holiday or special dinner.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    get water to a boil 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 to 6
    Calories 241 kcal

    Equipment

    • 12" fry pan

    Ingredients
      

    Blanching water

    • 5 tablespoons coarse kosher salt Use approx. 1 tablespoon per quart of water

    Green Beans

    • 12 ounces haricot verts of baby green beans
    • 2 teaspoons olive oil
    • 1 medium shallot halved lengthwise, sliced thin crosswise
    • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped or zested

    Toasted Almonds

    • 1 ½ tablespoons unsalted butter ghee or plant butter
    • 1 cup sliced raw almonds 4 ounces
    • 2 pinches sea salt

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Getting started

    • Fill a large pot (5-7 quarts) with water adding kosher salt at approximately 1 tablespoon per quart of water. Bring the water to a full boil. While you're waiting on the water to boil, set up the ice bath and toast the almonds.

    Toasted almonds

    • Add butter to a medium skillet or fry pan. Melt the butter over medium-low heat. Add the almonds and cook, stirring occasionally, until golden brown and fragrant, about 5 minutes. Don't walk away from the stove as nuts burn quickly.
      When done, sprinkle with a little extra salt and set the almonds aside on a baking sheet to cool. Use now for serving or keep in an airtight container in the refrigerator.

    Finish the green beans

    • When the water is boiling and the ice batch is ready, drop the beans into the boiling water and cook for 4 minutes. When done, remove the beans from the pot with tongs and plunge them into the ice water. When cold (they chill fast), drain the beans in a colander and dry on a clean kitchen towel.

    Serving

    • When ready to serve, heat the olive oil in a large fry pan and saute the shallot until soft, 2-3 minutes. Add garlic, cook 1 minute more. Add the green beans and heat through, turning occasionally, about 5 minutes. Serve scattered or tossed with the toasted almonds.

    Notes

    If pre-cooking green beans for serving a few days later, place cooked, drained green beans into an airtight container for up to 4 days. Do almonds ahead too. Then it's fast to get them on the table for serving.
    The almonds keep for about a month refrigerated. Use them on salads and other vegetables or to top yogurt or steel cut oats. 
    Shortcut: you can skip the shallots and garlic and toss the green beans with good olive oil (maybe a flavored olive oil like lemon or basil) and add the toasted almonds to serve.
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 241kcalCarbohydrates: 13gProtein: 8gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 11gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 11mgSodium: 1169mgPotassium: 403mgFiber: 6gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 816IUVitamin C: 18mgCalcium: 118mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Creamy White Bean Dip and Puree

    08/18/2026 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    A bowl of cream white bean dip tipped with olive oil, pepper, and herbs with colorful vegetables all around.

    Creamy white bean dip is a simple, healthy appetizer made with cannellini beans, extra-virgin olive oil, fresh lemon juice, and garlic that delivers far more flavor than its short ingredient list suggests. Serve it with crisp vegetables, crackers, or crostini for snacking and entertaining, or use it as a savory white bean purée beneath grilled shrimp, roasted fish, chicken, or vegetables.

    White bean dip drizzled with olive oil and sprinkled with herbs and pepper, with raw veggies.

    I love serving this white bean dip as a savory base for grilled shrimp, roasted fish, chicken, or vegetables, but it is just as useful as an everyday snack. Keep a container in the refrigerator along with prepped vegetables for easy, healthy snacking, then dress it up with herbs, lemon zest, or a drizzle of olive oil when entertaining. It truly does double duty.

    White Bean Dip Recipe Highlights

    • Creamy and easy - This white bean dip blends up smooth and creamy in minutes in a food processor.
    • Healthy and flavorful - Made with cannellini beans, olive oil, lemon, and garlic for fresh flavor and wholesome ingredients.
    • Versatile for serving - Serve it with vegetables, crackers, or toasted bread for snacking or easy entertaining. Make it ahead to save time.
    • More than a dip - Serve it as a creamy white bean puree beneath roasted fish, grilled chicken, pork, lamb, or vegetables.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Cannellini beans, olive oil, lemon juice, and garlic in prep bowls foe white bean dip.
    • Cannellini beans - The creamy base of the dip, with a mild flavor. Use canned for speed or homemade from dried if you prefer. Great northern and navy beans work as well.
    • Extra virgin olive oil - Adds richness, body, and better flavor. Flavored olive oils like lemon and rosemary work well too.
    • Lemon juice - Brightens the dip and keeps it from tasting flat or heavy.
    • Garlic - Gives it backbone and savory depth.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    White bean dip is so versatile! Use these ideas to change things up.

    • Beans - Swap the cannellini beans for Great Northern beans or navy beans if that's what you have on hand.
    • Garlic confit - Swap the raw garlic for garlic confit for a softer, sweeter garlic flavor and extra richness.
    • Fresh herbs - Add fresh parsley, basil, dill, chives, or thyme to change the flavor profile and make the dip more vibrant.
    • Greek yogurt - Blend in a spoonful or two of plain Greek yogurt for extra creaminess and a little more tang, if dairy is ok.
    • Tahini - Add a small amount of tahini for a deeper, nuttier flavor and a texture closer to hummus.
    • Warm spice - Try cumin, smoked paprika, Aleppo pepper, or red pepper flakes for a subtle flavor twist.

    How to Make White Bean Dip

    Rinsed and drained cannellini beans in a food processor workbowl.
    1. Add drained and rinsed cannellini beans to a food processor workbowl. Add the olive oil, 2 tablespoons lemon juice, garlic and salt.
    Pureed white bean for a dip in a food processor.
    1. Puree until very smooth. When almost done, scrape down the sides of the workbowl, taste and adjust with any more lemon juice (or water), or salt.
    A bowl of cream white bean dip tipped with olive oil, pepper, and herbs with colorful vegetables all around.

    Serving Suggestions

    As an appetizer dip - serve with raw veggies such as red pepper, cucumber slices, snap peas or carrots, pita chips or bread.

    More than a dip - Thin it with a little broth or water (if needed) and serve warm as a creamy base for roasted fish, shrimp, grilled meats, or vegetables. For more of a savory base, you can sauté shallot and garlic, add thyme and broth, then blend it warm. I saw this done at a nice wine country restaurant, then came home and copied the idea, it works great.

    A platter of grilled shrimp atop white bean puree with lemon wedges and herbs.

    Leftovers and Storage

    Store leftover white bean dip in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. The dip will thicken as it chills, so stir in a little water, olive oil, or lemon juice before serving to loosen the texture. For the best flavor, let it sit at room temperature for 15-20 minutes before serving.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I use dried beans instead of canned?

    Yes. Cook about 1 cup of dried cannellini beans until tender, which yields roughly the same amount as two 15-ounce cans. Drain well before blending.

    How do I make white bean dip smoother?

    Blend the dip a little longer, adding cold water, olive oil, or lemon juice a tablespoon at a time until it reaches the consistency you want. For an even creamier dip, blend in a spoonful or two of plain Greek yogurt. A high-powered blender will give you the silkiest texture, but a food processor works too.

    More Dip Recipes for Snacking and Entertaining

    For more dip and snack recipe ideas check out the recipe index page.

    • A sour cream and honey fruit dip surrounded by fresh fruit on an oval platter.
      5-Minute Fruit Dip
    • A bowl of cream Greek Tzatziki with dill and olive oil drizzle with raw veggies and crackers.
      Easy Tzatziki Recipe (Greek Yogurt Sauce)
    • Easy Green Goddess Dip (and Dressing)
    • A bowl of whipped ricotta cheese dip with endive leaf in for scooping.
      Whipped Ricotta Cheese (Dip or Spread)

    If You Make This White Bean Dip

    Please drop me a comment and let me know how you enjoyed it. I love hearing from you and your comments help others readers too. Thanks for supporting my site.

    📖 Recipe

    A bowl of cream white bean dip tipped with olive oil, pepper, and herbs with colorful vegetables all around.

    Creamy White Bean Dip

    Sally Cameron
    Creamy, healthy, and made in minutes in a food processor or blender, white bean dip is a versatile snack and entertaining recipe. It's also delicious served as a savory puree under grilled chicken, meats and seafood.
    No ratings yet
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Course Appetizer, Snack
    Servings 6 Yield 2 cups (or 4 as a savory puree)
    Calories 166 kcal

    Equipment

    • Food processor or blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 2-15 ounce cans cannellini beans drained and rinsed
    • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 3-4 tablespoons lemon juice taste and adjust
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • 1 garlic clove finely zested, microplaned

    Optional garnishes

    • chopped fresh parsley, cilantro, or mint
    • ground black pepper or aleppo pepper

    For serving

    • assorted mixed veggies such as bell peppers, zucchini, cucumber, endive leaves, snap peas, radishes, and carrots.
    • crostini, crackers, or pita bread

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Add everything to a food processor and puree, starting with 2 tablespoons of the lemon juice and adding the third if needed. Taste and adjust for salt, then add what you prefer, if anything.

    Notes

    If you want to cook your own beans from dried, you'll need 1 cup of dried beans, picked over, rinsed, then cooked until tender. Great northern beans and navy beans make a good swap if you can't get cannellini beans. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 166kcalCarbohydrates: 22gProtein: 8gFat: 7gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gSodium: 499mgPotassium: 7mgFiber: 7gSugar: 0.1gVitamin A: 0.3IUVitamin C: 2mgCalcium: 86mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Chocolate Banana Smoothie

    02/16/2024 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    two chocolate smoothies in glasses on an antique tray.

    This healthy chocolate banana smoothie is a high-protein breakfast shake with the creamy texture and rich chocolate flavor of a milkshake. Banana adds natural sweetness, while protein powder, milk of choice, and other nourishing ingredients make it satisfying enough to power a busy morning.

    Creamy chocolate smoothies in glasses topped with banana slices and cacao nibs.

    I've been making smoothies for more than 25 years and am always experimenting with new combinations to keep mornings interesting. Whether you're heading to work, fueling up after a workout, or looking for a satisfying grab-and-go breakfast, this chocolate banana smoothie is an easy choice. It blends in just a few minutes and delivers plenty of protein to help keep you satisfied, making it a delicious way to start the day.

    Chocolate Banana Smoothie Recipe Snapshot

    • High in protein - Protein powder and milk make it satisfying enough for breakfast or post-workout fuel.
    • Rich and creamy - Banana and cocoa create a smooth, milkshake-like texture.
    • Fast and portable - Blend it in minutes and take it with you on busy mornings.
    • Easy to customize - With your favorite milk, flaxseed, healthy fat, and other options.

    Want to make more healthy smoothies? Here's a guide to making healthy smoothies that really breaks down how to make smart choices.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for a chocolate smoothie on a gray counter.

    Smoothie Base

    • Milk - Use dairy milk or your favorite unsweetened non-dairy milk, such as almond, oat, coconut, or hemp milk.
    • Protein powder - Use a protein powder that fits your needs and dietary preferences. I prefer unflavored and unsweetened so I can control the sweetness and chocolate flavor. Check the label for protein content and choose a product with an ingredient list you are comfortable with.
    • Cocoa powder - Use unsweetened cocoa powder for rich chocolate flavor.
    • Banana - Adds natural sweetness and creates a thick, creamy texture. A frozen banana makes the smoothie especially cold and milkshake-like.
    • Sweetener - Depending on the ripeness of the banana and your protein powder, you may not need any. If desired, add a little maple syrup, liquid chocolate stevia, monk-fruit maple syrup, or simple syrup to taste.

    Optional Add-Ins

    • Ground flaxseed - Adds fiber, healthy fat, and a little protein. Use ground flaxseed rather than whole seeds, which are harder for the body to digest.
    • Cinnamon - A small pinch complements the chocolate and banana. Optional.
    • Healthy fat - A tablespoon of MCT oil is optional and adds richness. Nut or seed butter is another good option.
    • Maca powder - Optional. Maca is an adaptogenic root from Peru traditionally used to support energy and resilience to stress. Its earthy, malty flavor pairs well with chocolate. Start with a small amount, as the flavor can be assertive.

    Please see recipe card for measurements.

    Chef's tip: Bananas for Smoothies. Choose a slightly green banana for lower sugar and more resistant starch, a type of starch that functions more like fiber. As bananas ripen, the starch converts to sugar, making them softer and sweeter. To freeze bananas, peel and cut them into chunks, then freeze them in a single layer on a small sheet pan. Once frozen, transfer them to a zip-style freezer bag. They work like banana ice cubes, adding natural sweetness and a thick, creamy texture to smoothies.

    Substitutions and Smoothie Variations

    • Chocolate peanut butter - Add 1-2 tablespoons creamy peanut butter. Almond butter, cashew butter, or sunflower seed butter work too.
    • Chia instead of flax - Use 1 tablespoon chia seeds in place of the ground flaxseed. The smoothie will thicken as it stands.
    • Banana-free - Replace the banana with a little avocado for creaminess, then sweeten to taste.
    • Chocolate crunch - Sprinkle cacao nibs over the top just before serving.

    Chef's Tip: Try Homemade Milk - For fresh homemade milk without the additives found in many store-bought versions, try my homemade almond milk, coconut milk, cashew milk, or homemade hemp milk. Both are easy to make from pantry ingredients and work beautifully in smoothies.

    White round platter with a glass of hemp seed milk, a pitcher, and hemp seeds.

    How to Make a Chocolate Banana Smoothie

    Add all of the ingredients to a high-speed blender and blend until smooth and creamy. For an extra-cold smoothie, use a frozen banana or add a few ice cubes.

    Serving Suggestions

    Enjoy the smoothie right after blending for the best flavor and texture. To take it on the go, pour it into an insulated bottle and shake before drinking if it begins to separate.

    Garnish with cacao nibs, banana slices, unsweetened shredded coconut, or hemp seeds.

    This recipe makes one serving and works well as a grab-and-go breakfast, after-school snack, or post-workout smoothie.

    Chocolate smoothies with cacao nibs.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do I make a chocolate smoothie without added sugar

    Start with unsweetened milk and an unsweetened protein powder. A ripe banana may provide enough sweetness on its own, but for a lower-sugar smoothie, use a slightly green banana and sweeten to taste with monk fruit or liquid stevia instead of maple syrup or honey. Keep in mind that dairy milk contains naturally occurring milk sugar, while many unsweetened plant milks are lower in sugar. Check labels, as amounts vary by brand.

    What kind of milk should I use for a chocolate smoothie

    Dairy milk and most unsweetened plant milks work well. Almond, hemp, oat, coconut, cashew, and soy milk each add a slightly different flavor and texture. Choose one that fits your dietary needs and protein goals. For a creamier smoothie, use dairy, soy, oat, homemade almond, or homemade hemp milk. Thinner milks will produce a lighter smoothie.

    More Healthy Smoothie Recipes

    Smoothies are one of my favorite ways to pack more nutrition into a busy day. Whether you're looking for a quick breakfast, post-workout fuel, or a healthy snack, these smoothie recipes are easy to make and full of wholesome ingredients.

    • Beautiful bright pink red beet smoothies in tall glasses with red beets on the side.
      Healthy Red Beet Smoothie with Berries
    • Top down shot of a deep pink cherry smoothie in a tall glass with banana and a cherry.
      5-Minute Cherry Smoothie Recipe
    • Creamy orange pumpkin pie smoothie in a glass with a silver straw.
      Pumpkin Smoothie (Healthy & Easy)
    • blueberry green smoothie
      Blueberry Spinach Smoothie Recipe

    If You Make This Smoothie

    If you make this chocolate banana smoothie, drop me a comment and let me know how you made it. I love hearing from you and your comments help others readers as well.

    📖 Recipe

    chocolate maca smoothie | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Chocolate Banana Smoothie

    Sally Cameron
    Chocolaty, creamy and good for you, this smoothie will get your day started right with raw cacao powder for heart and brain health, and maca to help your body adapt to what they day throws at you.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course smoothie
    Cuisine American
    Servings 1 serving
    Calories 490 kcal

    Equipment

    • High speed blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ¼ cups milk of choice almond, dairy, oat, hemp, cashew,
    • 2 tablespoons unsweetened cocoa powder
    • 2 tablespoons ground flaxseed
    • 1 small banana
    • 1 scoop unsweetened, unflavored, protein powder of choice

    Optional Add-ins

    • 1 tablespoon coconut MCT oil
    • 1 tablespoon ground maca powder
    • 2 teaspoons monk fruit (for no sugar) See notes below
    • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon

    Optional Garnishes

    • 1 tablespoon raw cacao nibs

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Add all ingredients into a blender and blend until smooth and creamy.
    • If you prefer a cold smoothie, add a couple of ice cubes. Garnish as desired.

    Notes

    For sweeteners:
    Use a monk fruit simple syrup or maple syrup for sweetness with no added sugar. You can also use maple syrup or honey but they add their own flavor. Granular monk fruit works too, or chocolate stevia drops. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 490kcalCarbohydrates: 50gProtein: 41gFat: 19gSaturated Fat: 8gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gCholesterol: 87mgSodium: 168mgPotassium: 1175mgFiber: 10gSugar: 29gVitamin A: 639IUVitamin C: 9mgCalcium: 527mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Marinated Olives With Garlic and Herbs

    07/07/2026 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    A jar of marinated olives with thyme sprigs, bread slices on a marble board.

    Homemade marinated olives are one of the easiest appetizers you can make-and they taste far better than anything from a deli counter. Fragrant garlic-infused olive oil, bright herbs, citrus peel, briny capers, and a mix of plump olives create a Mediterranean-style appetizer that looks impressive but takes barely 20 minutes to prepare.

    Jars of  msrinated black and green olives with thyme, baguettes slices, and feta cheese cubes.

    Serve marinated olives with cocktails, wine, a cheese board, charcuterie board, or as part of a Mediterranean mezze platter. Use pitted olives for easy eating, or whole olives for the best texture and flavor. Either way, these olives are make-ahead friendly, naturally gluten-free, and perfect for effortless get-togethers.

    Marinated Olives Recipe Snapshot

    • Make-ahead - Prep in minutes, marinate in the refrigerator, and serve when ready.
    • Better than store-bought - Brighter, cleaner flavor with no mystery ingredients.
    • Customizable - Choose your favorite olives, herbs, peppers, and citrus.
    • Perfect for entertaining - A gorgeous, fuss-free appetizer that disappears fast.
    • Great for gifting - Spoon into a jar, tie with twine, and you have a beautiful homemade hostess gift.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for marinated olives with oil, herbs, garliccapers and vinegar.
    • Olive oil - The base of the marinade. Use a good extra-virgin olive oil you enjoy.
    • Black olives - Kalamata olives, for their deep purple, briny taste, slightly sharp, and meaty texture. Note below.
    • Green olives - The best option are the green Castelvetrano olives from Sicily for their bright green color, buttery, mild, and almost creamy texture.
    • Garlic cloves - Use the pre-peeled garlic cloves or peel fresh cloves yourself, both work.
    • Wine vinegar - Adds brightness, balances richness, and lowers the pH for safety, white wine vinegar or champagne vinegar.
    • Capers - Use non-pareil capers (the small ones) or larger capers if you prefer. They add a briny, salty flavor that complements the olives beautifully.
    • Herbs - Dried oregano and dried basil for classic Mediterranean flavor. Fresh thyme sprigs make it aromatic.
    • Lemon peel - Lemon zest strips lift the whole mix.
    • Red pepper flakes - A touch of warmth.

    Chef's Tip: Pitted or Whole Olives?
    Whole, un-pitted olives usually have the best texture and flavor because the pit helps the olive stay firm and meaty. Pitted olives are easier for guests to eat, but they can be softer and saltier because the brine reaches the inside of the olive. Use whole olives for the best bite, or pitted olives for easy entertaining, and be sure to put a small bowl out to dispose of pits.

    Substitutions & Variations

    • Olive options - Replace part of the olive mix with Cerignola olives if you can find them. They're large, plump, mild Italian olives with a wonderful meaty texture.
    • Sweet red teardrop peppers - These tiny Peruvian peppers, sometimes called Sweety Drops, add color, gentle sweetness, and a little tang. Look for them in jars at grocery stores, deli sections, or online.
    • More color - Add chopped pimentos or thinly sliced roasted red peppers.
    • Citrus - Try orange peel instead of lemon peel.
    • Spicier olives - Add extra red pepper flakes or a few slices of fresh chili pepper.

    Chef's Tip: Why You Poach Garlic First
    Most marinated olive recipes add raw garlic straight to olive oil. It's easy but not food safe. Raw garlic in oil can create the low-acid, low-oxygen environment where botulism can grow. Gently poaching the garlic in olive oil first makes the recipe food-safe, softens garlic's sharp bite, and infuses the oil with a mellow, aromatic flavor. It's delicious to eat too! Note: this isn't garlic confit, which cooks much longer (45-60 minutes) until very soft and spreadable. Here we're just lightly poaching the cloves to safely flavor the oil and olives.

    How to Make Marinated Olives

    You'll need a ¾ liter lidded jar or 26-ounce jar for the olives.

    Poaching whole peeled garlic cloves in a stainless steel pan.
    1. Add olive oil to a small saucepan (1 qt) and warm over low heat to 180-200°F. Add the garlic cloves. The oil may not completely cover the garlic, depending on your pan size, so gently swirl the pan or turn the cloves once or twice as they poach. Cook for 5 minutes, keeping the oil below a simmer.
    Garlic cloves in olive oil cooling in a steel bow. on a stovetop.
    1. Remove from the heat and cool completely before combining with the olives. Warm oil can soften the olives and dull their fresh, briny texture.
    A jar filled with olives, herbs, and lemon zest.
    1. Add olives, herbs, capers, vinegar, zest, and red chili peppers to a large jar.
    Pouring olive oil and garlic into a jar of olives for making marinated olives.
    1. Pour in the oil and garlic cloves. Marinate for at least 4 hours, but preferably overnight. Shake or stir the olives once or twice during marinating to redistribute the oil and seasonings.
    A jar of marinated olives with thyme sprigs, bread slices on a marble board.

    How to Serve Marinated Olives

    Olive oil naturally firms up when chilled and will liquefy again at room temperature, so be sure to get marinated olives out about 30 minutes ahead of time for serving.

    • Serve with a cheese board, charcuterie board, or Mediterranean mezze platter.
    • Tossed into salads, like this antipasto pasta salad.
    • With grilled fish or roasted chicken.
    • As an appetizer with cocktails.

    Note - Because the garlic is gently poached in olive oil it's safe to eat and has a mellow, softer flavor. Their main purpose is to safely infuse the oil and olives with flavor but they are delicious to eat with the marinated olives.

    Cubed Greek feta drizzled with homemade hot honey is a wonderful companion to these marinated olives. That's what's pictured in the main photo. It's another easy appetizer for entertaining.

    Storage

    • Store refrigerated for up to 2 weeks (must be refrigerated to be safe).
    • Olive oil will naturally firm up when chilled. Let sit at room temperature 20-30 minutes before serving to soften.

    More Easy Appetizer Recipes

    • A platter of antipasto skewers with olives, cheese, salami, and artichoke heart for appetizers.
      Antipasto Skewers (Easy Italian Appetizer)
    • A bowl of whipped ricotta cheese dip with endive leaf in for scooping.
      Whipped Ricotta Cheese (Dip or Spread)
    • A white bowl of roasted red pepper hummus to serve as an appetizer.
      Roasted Red Bell Pepper Hummus Recipe
    • A jar of golden glazed pecans on a white round marble plate.
      Maple Pecans (candied pecans)

    If You Make Marinated Olives

    Please leave a comment and let me know how they came out. I really appreciate hearing from you and your comments help other readers. Thanks for supporting my site.

    📖 Recipe

    A jar of marinated olives with thyme sprigs, bread slices on a marble board.

    Marinated Olives With Garlic and Herbs

    Sally Cameron
    A quick, flavorful olive appetizer with garlic, herbs, citrus, and peppers-perfect for parties and grazing boards, and they make a terrific hostess gift.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 5 minutes mins
    cooling and marinating time 5 hours hrs
    Total Time 5 hours hrs 10 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer, Snack
    Cuisine Mediterranean
    Servings 8 to 9 (Yield 3 cups)
    Calories 147 kcal

    Equipment

    • A very small pot, 1-quart
    • ¾ liter (26 ounce) lidded jar

    Ingredients
      

    • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
    • 6-8 large whole fresh garlic cloves
    • 1 ½ cups Castelvetrano olives
    • 1 cup Kalamata olives
    • 3 tablespoons sherry vinegar or white wine vinegar champagne vinegar option
    • ½ teaspoon dried oregano
    • 2-3 strips lemon zest
    • 1-2 tablespoon capers see note below
    • 2 sprigs fresh thyme
    • 1 pinch red pepper flakes optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Poach the garlic cloves

    • Add olive oil to the smallest saucepan you have ( a 1-quart) and warm over low heat to 180-200°F. Add the garlic cloves. The oil may not completely cover the garlic, depending on your pan size, so gently swirl the pan or turn the cloves once or twice as they poach. Cook for 5 minutes, keeping the oil below a simmer. Remove from the heat and cool completely.

    Finish the marinated olives

    • Add the olives, vinegar, oregano zest, capers, thyme and red pepper flakes to a jar. Pour the cool oil and garlic cloves over the top. Stir or shake gently to combine. Marinate for at least 4 hours, but ideally overnight, for the best flavor.
      Refrigerate and let come to room temperature before serving, about 30 minutes.

    Notes

    Storage: Keep olives submerged in their oil in an airtight jar and refrigerate for 10-14 days. The flavors continue to improve over time. For serving, let the olives stand at room temperature for 20-30 minutes so the oil loosens and aromatics bloom. The garlic is delicious to eat too!
    For serving as a mezze platter, cocktail nibble, or snack nibbles when entertaining, you can replace any herb springs with fresh herbs so they look nice and not tired and they do wither as they sit in the oil.
    Another olive option - For 3 cups of total olives, add ½ cup of Cerignola olives or oil-cured black olives. 
    If you have extra garlic-infused oil after poaching the garlic (because you had to add more to come close to submerging the garlic), refrigerate it and use within 1 week for sautéing vegetables, brushing on bread, or whisking into dressing.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 147kcalCarbohydrates: 1gProtein: 0.3gFat: 16gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 12gSodium: 292mgPotassium: 17mgFiber: 1gSugar: 0.1gVitamin A: 86IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 15mgIron: 0.3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Goat Cheese Crostini with Figs and Prosciutto

    08/04/2026 by Sally Cameron 6 Comments

    Goat cheese crostini with figs and prosciutto drizzled with honey.

    Goat cheese crostini are crisp toasted baguette slices spread with creamy goat cheese and finished with sweet or savory toppings. They're one of my go-to appetizers when friends come for dinner because they're easy to make and endlessly adaptable. Try the featured fresh fig, prosciutto, and hot honey version, roasted cherry tomatoes with basil, or one of the 12 seasonal topping ideas below to make them your own.

    Goat cheese crostini with figs and prosciutto on a marble board with hot honey on the side.

    Fresh figs make a beautiful seasonal topping, but you can use sliced dried figs or fig jam when fresh figs are unavailable. Once you know the simple goat cheese crostini method, mix and match the sweet and savory combinations below for parties, holidays, or an easy appetizer to take to friends.

    Goat Cheese Crostini Recipe Snapshot

    • Easy and fast - Toast the baguette, spread with softened goat cheese, and add your toppings. Use either GF baguette or wheat baguette.
    • Endlessly versatile - Choose from sweet or savory combinations for every season and occasion.
    • Perfect for entertaining - Serve them at parties, holiday gatherings, wine nights, or take a platter to friends.
    • Make them your own - Try fresh figs, prosciutto, and hot honey or balsamic glaze, or try roasted tomatoes, pesto, blueberry compote, or check the chart below for more ideas.

    Chef's tip on baguettes: Baguettes vary in size. If yours is long and narrow, slice it on a slight angle to create a larger surface for the toppings. If it is wider, cut it straight across into rounds. Either shape works well for goat cheese crostini. Cut a few extra slices because baguettes sometimes have large holes inside-or because someone may steal a few for snacks. If you cannot find a gluten-free baguette, use a 2-inch round cookie cutter to cut circles from slices of gluten-free bread, then brush and toast them the same way.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Figs, baguette, olive oil, goat cheese and prosciutto to make crostini.

    For the crostini

    • Baguette - Use a regular or gluten-free baguette sliced into ½-inch pieces.
    • Olive oil - A light brushing helps the crostini toast until crisp and golden.
    • Goat cheese - I buy a log and let it soften before spreading so it glides easily over the toasted bread. A tub of spreadable goat cheese works too. Buy plain so the flavors do not compete with your toppings.

    For the featured fig topping

    • Fresh figs - Choose ripe figs that are soft but not mushy. When fresh figs are unavailable, use sliced dried figs or fig jam.
    • Prosciutto - Adds a savory, salty contrast to the sweet figs.
    • Hot honey - Brings sweetness with a gentle kick. Regular honey also works, as does balsamic glaze.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Chef's Tip on buying and using fresh figs: Fresh figs are sweet and tender, with delicate skin and a light crunch from their tiny seeds. Because they are highly perishable, buy them the day you plan to serve them or no more than a day ahead, depending on ripeness. When fresh figs are unavailable, sliced dried figs or fig jam make excellent year-round alternatives. Learn more about the different varieties of figs.

    Fresh figs have a short season, so make the most of them while they're available. They're also delicious in my Fig Salad with Balsamic Vinaigrette.

    How to Make Goat Cheese Crostini

    Sliced baguette on a white cutting board with a serrated knife.
    1. Slice the baguette on a diagonal into ½" wide pieces. 12 crostini serve 4-6 people.
    Baguette slices brushed with olive oil with a pastry brush.
    1. Brush slices lightly with olive oil and place on a parchment lined baking sheet. Preheat oven to 350°F.
    Golden baked crostini on a parchment covered baking sheet.
    1. Bake about 8 minutes until golden. Let the crostini cool. They crisp as they cool, then spread with the softened goat cheese.
    Slicing prosciutto pieces in half to make goat cheese crostini.
    1. If you are making the fig variation, slice the prosciutto in half lengthwise and fold the pieces to fit on the goat cheese covered crostini, and add a quartered fig to each piece.

    Don't like goat cheese? Try using whipped ricotta cheese instead.

    Chef's Make-Ahead Tip: Bake the crostini ahead, cool them completely, and store them in an airtight container or zip-style bag at room temperature. Spread with goat cheese and add the toppings shortly before serving so the crostini stay crisp.

    Two goat cheese crostini with figs and prosciutto on a small plate with platter beside.

    Seasonal Goat Cheese Crostini Topping Ideas

    SeasonTopping Ideas
    SpringStrawberries, balsamic & basil • Sweet pea puree & mint • Creamy artichoke spread • Apricot preserves, pistachios & thyme
    SummerRoasted tomatoes & basil • Pesto • Peaches, prosciutto & hot honey • Blueberry compote & pistachios • Classic bruschetta
    FallFresh figs, prosciutto & hot honey • Fig jam & walnuts • Apple, walnuts & maple • Mushrooms & thyme • Caramelized onions
    WinterPear, walnuts & honey • Cranberry-orange sauce • Pomegranate & pistachios • Duxelles • Fig jam & bacon crumbles

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve goat cheese crostini at room temperature on a platter, and add hot honey or balsamic glaze just before serving. They're perfect for cocktail parties, holiday gatherings, wine nights, or as an easy appetizer to take to friends (assemble there).

    Plan on about two crostini per person when serving several appetizers. If they're the main pre-dinner nibble, allow three per person. The recipe is easy to scale up for a larger gathering.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make goat cheese crostini ahead of time?

    Toast the crostini ahead and store them at room temperature in an airtight container. Add the goat cheese and toppings shortly before serving so they stay crisp.

    What can I use instead of fresh figs?

    Use thinly sliced dried figs or fig jam. Both work well with prosciutto, hot honey, balsamic glaze, or toasted nuts. Or try, blueberry compote, pesto, roasted tomatoes, sautted mushrooms, there are many options. Check out the chart above.

    Can I use regular bread instead of a baguette?

    Yes. Cut small rounds from sturdy bread slices, brush lightly with olive oil, and toast them as you would baguette slices.

    More Appetizer Recipes

    No matter the season or occasion. there are appetizers for all your entertaining needs. Here are a few ideas, and check out more ideas on the appetizer recipes page index.

    • A platter of antipasto skewers with olives, cheese, salami, and artichoke heart for appetizers.
      Antipasto Skewers (Easy Italian Appetizer)
    • platter of oven baked chicken wings piled high with a buffalo ranch dressing in a small bowl.
      Oven Baked Chicken Wings
    • Spinach stuffed mushrooms on a gray serving plate with melted parmesan on top, with parsley.
      Spinach Stuffed Mushrooms With Parmesan Cheese
    • A jar of marinated olives with thyme sprigs, bread slices on a marble board.
      Marinated Olives With Garlic and Herbs

    If You Make Goat Cheese Crostini

    Please drop me a comment and let me know how you served them. I love hearing from you and your comments help other readers too.

    📖 Recipe

    Goat cheese crostini with figs and prosciutto drizzled with honey.

    Goat Cheese Crostini with Figs and Prosciutto

    Sally Cameron
    This recipe is easily assembled as guests arrive. Bake crostini up to an hour ahead and place on a platter. Allow the goat cheese to warm up for easier spreading. Balsamic syrup can be homemade or purchased. If you can't find gluten-free baguette, use GF bread, trim crusts, and cut into rounds with a 2" cookie cutter.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 1 hour hr 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 2 per person
    Calories 276 kcal

    Equipment

    • Serrated bread knife
    • Rimmed baking sheet
    • Parchment paper
    • Pastry brush

    Ingredients
      

    Crostini

    • 12 slices baguette
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil

    Crostini Toppings

    • 4-5 ounces plain goat cheese, softened to room temperature or use a tub of spreadable goat cheese
    • 3 ounces thinly sliced Prosciutto 6 slices, sliced in half lengthwise
    • 3-4 fresh figs washed, stem cut off and quartered
    • 2 tablespoons hot honey or balsamic glaze or good balsamic vinegar

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Slice Crostini

    • Pre-heat oven to 350°F. With a serrated knife, slice the baguette into ½" wide pieces on the diagonal. Place slices on a rimmed baking sheet covered with parchment or aluminum foil.
      Note - If you are making cfostini from gluten-free bread, cut them now.

    Prep

    • Slice Prosciutto lengthwise into into halves. fold or ribbon each piece to fit onto a crostini.

    Bake Crostini

    • Lightly brush the baguette slices with olive oil. Bake for 6-8 minutes, until lightly golden. The crostini will not feel fully crisp when they first come out of the oven, but they will crisp as they cool.
      To make them ahead, cool completely and store in an airtight container or zip-style bag at room temperature until ready to assemble.
    • Assemble Crostini
    • Spread each crostini with softened goat cheese. Top with a folded ribbon of prosciutto and one fig quarter.
      Just before serving, drizzle with hot honey, balsamic glaze, or a small amount of good-quality balsamic vinegar.

    Notes

    For more ideas on how to top goat cheese crostini, please see the chart of seasonal ideas in the post. 
    If fresh figs are out of season, used dried figs or fig jam. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2piecesCalories: 276kcalCarbohydrates: 27gProtein: 9gFat: 15gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gTrans Fat: 0.02gCholesterol: 18mgSodium: 368mgPotassium: 136mgFiber: 1gSugar: 12gVitamin A: 236IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 71mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Southwestern Turkey Chili

    12/01/2014 by Sally Cameron 5 Comments

    Southwestern turkey chili

    My leftover Thanksgiving turkey needed to be finished up. I debated what to make with it. Tacos? Turkey enchiladas? Soup? On this gray and rainy day, the winner was turkey chili - a Southwestern-style with warm flavors of cumin, ancho chili pepper and  tomatillos. Healthy and easy to make in under 30 minutes, it will warm you up as we head into the busy-ness of the Christmas season.

    Southwestern Turkey Chili | AFoodCentricLife.com

    I am not sure why leftovers so often get a bad rap. Leftovers area a good thing. In fact, I plan for them. They save you time in the kitchen and are thrifty because you can turn them into other meals.

    For this Southwestern turkey chili, I used leftover turkey from Thanksgiving and extra turkey broth, which I made ahead and froze. It's good in soups, chili and risottos. You could also use leftover chicken and chicken broth.

    Without Leftovers, Do This

    No leftovers? No problem. Roast some turkey breast or chicken breast to make the chili. For chicken, buy bone-in breasts, season and roast at 375º for about 30 minutes or until they reach 165º. Cool, remove meat and dice. You can do the same thing with a turkey breast. Many meat counters sell split turkey breasts as a whole one is so big. You might even be able to find already roasted turkey breast at your market.

    Maybe ground turkey is easier for you. If you want to use ground turkey, simply sauté the onion, carrot and celery unit soft, then add a pound of ground dark turkey and brown until it is no longer pink, then continue with the recipe.

    Ingredient Notes and Options

    • Tomatillos (which look like little green tomatoes covered in a paper husk) are nice in this but if you can't get them, use about ½ cup of diced green bell pepper or a fresh, mild green chili pepper.
    • Ancho chili pepper is the dried form of the poblano chili. The rich burgundy color offers a mild and sweet heat. Pure ancho chili is a great add to your spice pantry. It's also the base for many chili pepper blends. so you can create your won blends with it too.
    • No pintos in the pantry? You can substitute black beans or even cannellini beans instead. Pintos add a definite Southwestern profile.
    • If you have the option, use dried Mexican oregano. Mexican oregano is stronger and less minty than Greek oregano.
    • If you can't stand cilantro, substitute flat leaf parsley.
    • For garnishing, buttery Jack cheese is nice with a little extra cilantro or parsley. Non-dairy folks can skip the cheese. Try diced avocado instead.
    • On spices - For the paprika and black pepper, I use smoked versions. If you like smoky flavors, try them. They add great flavor to this chili and many other dishes. You can also use regular paprika and black pepper. If you like heat, sharp paprika will add it. Or use a pinch of cayenne or red pepper flakes.

    One last note - If you would rather make this a soup, just add more broth. I did that to stretch this for lunch today. It was terrific.

    Southwestern turkey chili in a bowl with cheese to garnish.

    Serving - Garnishes, Salad and Vinaigrette

    • For garnishing, grated buttery Jack cheese is nice, unless you don't eat dairy.
    • A little extra cilantro or parsley adds color and fresh flavor.
    • Serve a big green salad for balance. I like a spinach salad with avocado and tomatoes.
    • Skip the bottled dressing and make your own, fresh. For vinaigrette, here is a quick lesson. The ratio of 3 parts oil to 1 part vinegar is a good place to start. If I am dressing a salad for just the two of us, I use 2 teaspoons of oil to 1 part vinegar as it's a small amount. Whisk your vinaigrette in a bowl, add the greens and toss with your hands.
    • Use a good quality olive oil for your vinaigrette. My most recent discovery is artisan, family-made, California olive oil from Il Fiorello. It means the little flower in Italian. Check out their website, their oils, and their story. Good olive oil a welcome Christmas gift for the cook in your life (or yourself).

    For another recipe using leftover turkey, try this turkey tetrazzini casserole.

    📖 Recipe

    Southwestern Turkey Chili | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Southwestern Turkey Chili

    Sally Cameron
    With warm Southwestern flavors, this healthy turkey chili is quick to make with leftover turkey. Chicken works too. Use homemade broth for the best flavor. If you can't get tomatillos, use a green bell pepper or mild green chili pepper, about ½ cup. For smoky flavors, use smoked spices. Serves 3-4 depending on your sides (add a salad).
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 25 minutes mins
    Course Entree, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Servings 3 to 4
    Calories 476 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large soup pot like a Dutch oven

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 tablespoons olive oil
    • 1 cup chopped onion ½ a medium
    • 1 cup chopped carrot 2 large
    • 1 cup chopped celery 2 ribs
    • 1 cup chopped tomatillo about 3
    • 2-3 large garlic cloves finely chopped
    • 2 teaspoons cumin
    • 2 teaspoons dried oregano preferably Mexican
    • 1 teaspoon ancho chili powder
    • 1 teaspoon smoked paprika or regular
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper I use smoked pepper
    • 3 cups diced roast turkey (or chicken) 16 ounces
    • 1 ½ cups  turkey broth or chicken broth preferably homemade
    • 1 15-ounce can pinto beans rinsed and drained
    • 1-2 tablespoons chopped cilantro or parsley
    • ½ cup grated jack cheese optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Add olive oil to a medium pot over medium low heat. When hot, add onion, carrot, celery and tomatillo. Sauté until vegetables soften, about 7-10 minutes. Add garlic, cumin, oregano, ancho chili powder, and paprika. Allow them to cook for a few minutes to allow the spices essential oils to release. Add salt and pepper.
    • Add turkey, beans, and broth. Heat until hot. Top with cilantro and cheese, optional.

    Notes

    For the paprika and black pepper, I use smoked versions. If you like smoky flavors, try them. They add great flavor to this chili and many other dishes. You can also use regular paprika and black pepper. If you like heat, sharp paprika will add it. Or use a pinch of cayenne or red pepper flakes.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 476kcalCarbohydrates: 17gProtein: 53gFat: 22gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 11gCholesterol: 136mgSodium: 519mgPotassium: 976mgFiber: 5gSugar: 7gVitamin A: 8080IUVitamin C: 13mgCalcium: 251mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    How to Make Gluten-Free Croutons

    08/21/2024 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    A bowl of golden baked croutons in a glass bowl on a counter.

    Crunchy, garlicky, and the perfect addition to salads, soups, and more, gluten-free croutons are hard to stop eating! So easy to make just cube gluten-free bread, toss with my butter-oil-garlic mixture, and bake until crisp. They beat anything from the store hands down. Make them ahead and keep a batch in the pantry. Don't be surprised if they disappear. Dairy-free option too.

    A tall glass jar of golden brown homemade croutons with some on the table.

    Once you taste these homemade gluten-free croutons and see how easy they are to make you will skip store-bought croutons. Beware though, they are absolutely addictive! Not devouring these tasty croutons when they come out of the oven is the trick. Seriously, I had a friend eat much of this batch for shooting and had to make more. Skip the store bought and make your own croutons.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Gluten-free croutons are super easy to make with simple ingredients.
    • Dairy-free, vegan option.
    • Usable for garnishes in many ways.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients to make homemade croutons, bread, olive oil, butter, salt, and garlic powder.
    • Bread: I prefer Canyon Bakehouse gluten-free bread. I use their Heritage Style Honey White bread as it's a larger loaf of bread (24-ounces) with larger slices. If you use other bread, just be sure you have 24 ounces. At the grocery store look in the freezer section.
    • Butter: I only buy unsalted butter, (sweet butter) so I control the salt. Once you get used to unsalted butter you won't believe how salty regular butter tastes.
    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil adds nice flavor, and the combination with butter makes for extra flavorful croutons.
    • Garlic: Use garlic powder or granulated garlic.

    For measurements, salt and black pepper, please see the recipe card.

    Here's another terrific recipe I make using this bread, my traditional gluten-free Thanksgiving stuffing. You'd never know it's gluten-free.

    Chef's tip on bread: While I use fresh bread, you can use stale bread if you want to or have bread to use up. You'll need to reduce baking time. When buying bread, look for larger slices as many brands have small slices. Crusts off or on? Crusts provide nice texture and a rustic feel, plus there is no waste. If you want to trim the crusts, please do. I've made them both ways.

    Substitutions and Variations

    Want to get creative? Try these options:

    • For plain croutons, skip the garlic, or add a little onion powder.
    • For dairy-free croutons or vegan croutons, use plant butter and bread with no dairy (like milk powder).
    • Spice them up! Add a little smoked paprika, chili powder, or cumin to the oil-butter mixture before tossing with the bread cubes. Turmeric adds more golden color.
    • If you like Hawaiian Sweet bread, use this gluten-free bread.
    • Add herbs! Either dried, like Italian seasoning, or fresh herbs, like finely chopped thyme. Add to the butter-oil mixture when tossing the bread cubes.
    • Toss with finely grated Parmesan cheese before baking for cheesy croutons.

    Great croutons are a must for Caesar Salads and even better with homemade Caesar dressing.

    How to Make Gluten-Free Croutons

    Melted butter, olive oil, and garlic in a small glass bowl.
    Step 1: Melt together the butter, oil, and garlic in the microwave.
    Plain cubes of bread with crusts in a glass bowl for making croutons.
    Step 2: Cut bread slices into ¾-inch to 1- inch cubes, using the crusts. Skip the heels.
    Bread cubes tossed with butter and olive oil in a glass bowl.
    Step 3: Toss the bread cubes with the butter-oil blend in a large bowl until you have well coated bread cubes.
    Golden baked bread croutons on a baking sheet with parchment.
    Step 4: Scatter bread cubes on a parchment paper lined baking sheet in a single layer. Sprinkle with salt now if using.
    Golden brown baked croutons on a baking sheet with parchment.
    Step 5: Bake croutons for approximately 30 minutes. Timing depends on your oven, the type of bread you are using, and how crisp you like your croutons. Eat one to test. They will crisp a little more upon fully cooling.

    Chef's tip: For crispier croutons, bake them a few minutes longer. You can also reduce the oven temperature and bake them a little longer, which dries the croutons more. If after baking and cooling you want them crisper, pop them back into the oven for a few additional minutes until you get a satisfying crunch.

    Serving Suggestions

    Use croutons to garnish your favorite soups and to give simple salads a little oomph. Crush gluten-free croutons a bit and scatter over vegetable dishes, especially simply blanched green beans. They add great texture, flavor, and visual interest. And for tomato soup? Gluten-free croutons are a must!

    If somehow the croutons got soft in storage and you want them crisped up, pop them into a 300°F oven on a baking tray for a few minutes.

    Check out this recipe to make gluten free breadcrumbs.

    A bowl of golden baked croutons in a glass bowl on a counter.

    Storage

    Before storing gluten-free croutons, be sure they are fully cooled and crisp. Leftover croutons last approximately 2 weeks in a cool pantry in an airtight container, if they are well baked, crisp, and the moisture is out of them. Otherwise they risk developing mold. If you see any signs of spoilage, toss them and make a new batch. Mine never seem to last that long (we eat them!).

    While some recipes say you can freeze them and re-crisp in the oven, I've never tried this. This is such an easy recipe, fresh croutons are always better than frozen.

    Recipe FAQs

    Should I remove the crusts before making croutons?

    It's personal preference as to whether you trim the crusts. Crusts add a nice rustic texture, plus more crunch and color. If you prefer trimmed crusts, go ahead and trim. It's up to you. It's also up to you how large of bread cubes you cut. Larger croutons require a little longer baking. This is true for regular croutons and gluten free croutons as well.

    Do gluten-free croutons taste the same as regular ones?

    The way I make them, yes, gluten-free crotons taste juts as good as croutons made with wheat bread. The trick is in the butter-olive oil blend I make for baking croutons. It gives amazing flavor and you'd never know they are gluten-free.

    What oil should I use for croutons?

    I prefer the flavor of olive oil, then mix it with unsalted butter for great flavor. You can also use avocado oil or a healthy neutral oil. Skip vegetable oil, canola oil, seed oils, and industrially produced oils in general for healthier croutons.

    Recipes for Using Gluten-free Croutons

    If you can't think of ways to use croutons, try them on these recipes.

    • Creamy squash and apple soup in a gray bowl with pumpkin seeds and chives.
      Creamy Butternut and Apple Soup
    • A single bowl of tomato soup with a sprig of rfesh thyme leaves and silver spoon.
      Quick Tomato Soup From Canned Tomatoes
    • Color Hawaiian salad with tomatoes, avocado, pineapple, beets. macadamia nuts and more in a bowl with utensils.
      Hawaiian Salad With Goat Cheese

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you make gluten-free croutons, I hope you'll comment and let me know how you liked it. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers and I appreciate hearing from you, and I'll respond to each comment.

    📖 Recipe

    A bowl of golden baked croutons in a glass bowl on a counter.

    Gluten-free Croutons

    Sally Cameron
    Golden, crunchy, crispy, garlicky, no one will know these croutons are gluten-free. Yield is 13 ounces of baked croutons. Recipe can be halved for a smaller batch.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 25 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Salad, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Servings 10 to 12 servings
    Calories 294 kcal

    Equipment

    • Rimmed baking sheet
    • Parchment paper

    Ingredients
      

    • 24 ounces gluten free bread loaf See note below on the bread I use
    • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter
    • 1 teaspoon granulated garlic or garlic powder
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt optional
    • ⅛ teaspoon black pepper optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Pre-heat the oven to 350°F and line a baking sheet with parchment.
    • Slice the bread into ¾-inch to 1-inch cubes, using the crusts (or removing them first). Using the crusts makes more croutons and adds rustic charm. Add the bread cubes to a large bowl.
    • Melt the butter, oil, and garlic together in the microwave, then add to the bread cubes and toss well with your hands or large spoons. Spread the bread cubes in a single layer on the baking sheet. Sprinkle with salt if using. Bake croutons until crisp, about 30 minutes. Eat one to feel the crunch and see if they are baked enough for you. Croutons will dry a little more upon cooling.
      Leave the tray on the counter to cool and dry, then package in an airtight container. Croutons last approximately 2 weeks in a cool dry place like your pantry.

    Notes

    I use Canyon Bakehouse Heritage Style Honey White bread. Find it in the freezer section in many grocery stores. 
    Bread note: I use most of this loaf of bread, skipping the heels and allowing extra pieces for possible holes in the middle. I used 11-12 slices in total.  You can easily cut this recipe in half. 
    There are lots of substitutions and variations, please see the post.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 0.33cupCalories: 294kcalCarbohydrates: 37gProtein: 4gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 24mgSodium: 340mgPotassium: 5mgFiber: 2gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 289IUVitamin C: 0.004mgCalcium: 93mgIron: 0.4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Cottage Cheese Alfredo Sauce

    08/25/2026 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    A bowl of pasta noodles tossed with cottage cheese alfredo sauce, black pepper and parsley.

    Cottage cheese Alfredo sauce is a rich, velvety pasta sauce made with cottage cheese and Parmesan. It has the creamy texture and big, cheesy flavor of a decadent Alfredo, yet it is lighter than traditional Alfredo, naturally high in protein, and ready in just 15-20 minutes. It's an easy way to enjoy a creamy pasta dinner with a better nutritional profile. Toss it with hot pasta, or add chicken, shrimp, salmon, or vegetables.

    Bowls of fettuccine tossed with creamy cottage cheese alfredo sauce sprinkled with pepper and parsley.

    I first threw this sauce together for a quick dinner several years ago, and every time I make it, I am still amazed by how ridiculously easy and delicious it is. Cottage cheese has long been a staple in my kitchen because it is versatile, satisfying, and naturally high in protein. Here, it becomes a rich, velvety sauce with big Parmesan flavor and all the comfort of traditional Alfredo, but with far less fat and much more protein.

    Cottage Cheese Alfredo Sauce Recipe Snapshot

    • Ready in 15-20 minutes - A fast, easy sauce for busy weeknights.
    • High protein - Each serving has about 17 grams of protein before adding chicken, shrimp, salmon, or another protein.
    • Creamy without cream - Blended cottage cheese creates a rich, silky-smooth sauce.
    • Simple ingredients - Made with cottage cheese, Parmesan, milk, garlic, butter, and a few pantry staples.
    • Versatile - Toss it with any shape of pasta, or spoon it over chicken, shrimp, salmon, or vegetables.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for cottage cheese alfredo sauce in prep bowls on a marble counter.
    • Milk: Whole milk makes the creamiest Alfredo sauce, although low-fat milk works too.
    • Cottage cheese: Use full-fat for the best flavor and texture. Some brands are looser and wetter, while others are firmer and drier.
    • Parmesan cheese: Finely grated Parmesan adds rich, savory flavor and melts smoothly into the warm sauce.
    • Garlic: One fresh garlic clove adds a welcome punch of flavor.
    • Nutmeg: Just a pinch or two enhances the sauce and is classic in Alfredo.
    • Parsley: Finely chopped fresh parsley adds a little color and freshness, optional.
    • Cornstarch: A small amount helps thicken and emulsify the sauce so it stays smooth and cohesive.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Try another hard Italian cheese: Substitute Asiago, Pecorino Romano, or Grana Padano for some or all of the Parmesan. Each gives the sauce a slightly different flavor.
    • Add vegetables: Stir in peas, broccoli, asparagus, spinach, or sautéed mushrooms.
    • Add herbs: Finish with parsley, basil, chives, or thyme.
    • Add protein: Toss with chicken, shrimp, salmon, or turkey for a heartier meal.

    Chef's Tip: Build it like a cheese sauce. Most cottage cheese Alfredo recipes blend everything together at once. I blend the cottage cheese and milk first, then warm the mixture gently and stir in the Parmesan on the stovetop. Adding the Parmesan separately allows it to melt gradually, creating a smoother, more cohesive sauce with better control over the final texture.

    How to Make Cottage Cheese Alfredo Sauce

    Pureeing cottage cheese and milk in a blender until smooth.
    1. Puree the milk and cottage cheese in a blender until very smooth.
    Cooking garlic in melted butter in a white pot.
    1. Melt butter in a heavy 3 quart pot over medium low heat, then add garlic and saute until soft, 30 seconds.
    Pouring pureed cottage cheese and milk into a pan to make an alfredo sauce.
    1. Pour in the pureed cottage cheese and milk. Stir until smooth.
    A bowl of grated parmesan cheese pouring into  a pot for a cheese sauce.
    1. Add the parmesan cheese and cook over low heat until melted in, stirring. Low heat prevents the sauce from getting grainy.
    Thickened cottage cheese alfredo sauce coating the back of a spoon.
    1. Add the cornstarch to the water in a small bowl and pour into the sauce. Cook 1-2 minutes until thickened. Sauce should coat the back of a spoon.
    Black pepper on top of a cheese sauce to season.
    1. Season with black pepper and nutmeg. Sauce is ready to serve. If it gets too thick, add a bit more milk to thin.
    A bowl of fettuccine alfredo made with cottage cheese and parmesan, with parsley.

    Chef's tip: Adjust the consistency. Cottage cheese varies by brand; some are looser and wetter, while others are firmer and drier. Start with ½ cup of milk, then add the final tablespoon as needed. If the sauce becomes very thick as the Parmesan melts, keep whisking and add a little more milk until it is smooth and velvety, and the consistency you want.

    Serving Suggestions

    Toss cottage cheese Alfredo sauce with any shape of hot pasta, from fettuccine and linguine to penne, rigatoni, or gluten-free pasta. Add chicken, shrimp, salmon, or vegetables for a complete meal.

    It is also delicious spooned over steamed broccoli, roasted asparagus, cauliflower, baked potatoes, or spaghetti squash.

    Storage & leftovers

    Store cottage cheese Alfredo sauce in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. For the best texture, store the sauce separately from the pasta.

    Reheat gently in a small saucepan over low heat, whisking in a splash of milk as needed. Do not let the sauce boil, or it will separate (break). Reheat gently in a small saucepan over low heat, whisking in a splash of milk as needed. You can also microwave the sauce at 70% power in 30-second intervals, stirring between each, until hot. Do not let it boil.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can you taste the cottage cheese in Alfredo sauce?

    Once blended smooth and combined with Parmesan, the cottage cheese flavor is mild. The sauce tastes rich, cheesy, and much closer to Alfredo than to plain cottage cheese.

    Why did my cottage cheese Alfredo get too thick?

    Parmesan thickens the sauce quickly, and cottage cheese varies by brand. Keep the heat low, whisk constantly, and add milk a tablespoon at a time until the sauce is smooth and velvety.

    More Pasta Recipes

    • Stuffed shells with kale and ricotta
      Pasta Shells Stuffed With Ricotta
    • Gluten-free mac and cheese, baked with a Parmesan crust topping.
      Gluten-Free Mac and Cheese (Baked)
    • A white bowl of sun-dried tomato pesto pasta with basil and parmesan garnish.
      Creamy Sun-Dried Tomato Pesto Pasta
    • seared scallops with pasta
      Pasta Recipe With Scallops, Tomatoes, and Zucchini

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this cottage cheese Alfredo sauce, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A bowl of pasta noodles tossed with cottage cheese alfredo sauce, black pepper and parsley.

    Cottage Cheese Alfredo Sauce

    Sally Cameron
    No ratings yet
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Sauce
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 Yield 1 ½ cups
    Calories 203 kcal

    Equipment

    • 3 quart pan, such as a saucier

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 cup full fat cottage cheese
    • 1 cup finely grated parmesan cheese plus more to finish if preferred
    • ½ cup whole milk plus a little more if needed to thin
    • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter
    • 1 large garlic clove finely zested
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1-2 pinches nutmeg
    • 1 tablespoon cornstarch
    • 1 tablespoon water for the slurry
    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped parsley garnish, optional

    Pasta (if serving over pasta)

    • 8 ounces pasta of choice, fettuccine is classic other shapes work as well

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Start pasta water

    • If serving with pasta, get a large pot of water on to boil and add a little salt.

    Blend the base

    • Blend the cottage cheese and milk until smooth in a blender, about 30 seconds.

    Make the sauce

    • Gently sauté the garlic in butter, 30 seconds on med low heat in a 3 quart pan.
      Add the blended cottage cheese and milk to the pan, stir and heat. Add the parmesan cheese and whisk until smooth, turning heat down heat to ow so the sauce does not boil and break (separate).

    Thicken sauce

    • To thicken the Alfredo sauce, add the cornstarch and water and mix smooth, then whisk in to the sauce. Cook 1-2 minutes to thicken. If it gets too thick, add a bit more milk, a tablespoon at a time. The slurry helps the sauce stay cohesive and smooth.
      Add pepper, and a pinch or two of nutmeg. Warm it gently in the pan—don’t boil it. oss with hot pasta and serve.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 6tablespoonsCalories: 203kcalCarbohydrates: 6gProtein: 16gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.3gMonounsaturated Fat: 3gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 37mgSodium: 578mgPotassium: 130mgFiber: 0.1gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 407IUVitamin C: 0.2mgCalcium: 380mgIron: 0.3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Smoked Spatchcock Chicken

    08/11/2026 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Smoked spatchcock chicken on a wood cutting board with a carving knife.

    Smoked spatchcock chicken is a fast, easy way to cook a juicy whole chicken on a pellet grill or smoker. Flattening the bird helps it cook evenly, brown beautifully, and finish in about an hour. I prefer smoking it at 375°F because the higher temperature produces better skin while still adding delicious wood-smoke flavor, making it practical for a weeknight instead of an all-day project.

    A juicy, burnished, smoked spatchcock chicken just off the grill with carving knife, fork, and bbq glaze.

    I roast, rotisserie, or spatchcock a chicken every week, and this smoked method has become one of my favorites because it is so easy and the leftovers are great. A pellet grill cooks with indirect, circulating heat and real hardwood smoke, much like a wood-fired convection oven, so the chicken cooks evenly while staying moist. A simple dry rub builds flavor, and a light barbecue glaze at the end adds color, shine, and just enough tangy sweetness.

    Smoked Spatchcock Chicken Recipe Snapshot

    • Ready in about an hour - A faster way to cook a whole smoked chicken.
    • Cooks evenly - Flattening the chicken helps the breast and dark meat finish at nearly the same time.
    • Better browned skin - Cooking at 375°F gives you better skin while still adding smoky flavor.
    • Simple ingredients - Olive oil, dry rub, and an optional barbecue glaze create plenty of flavor.
    • Easy to scale - Cook two or more chickens at once for a crowd or planned leftovers.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    A whole chicken along with dry rub blend and olive oil being prepped for a smoked chicken.
    • Chicken - A whole chicken, about 4½ pounds.
    • Oil - Extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil helps the dry rub adhere and encourages browning.
    • Dry rub - I use my homemade all-purpose dry rub, or use your favorite chicken or barbecue seasoning blend.
    • Barbecue sauce - Use your favorite sauce, or try my homemade barbecue sauce.
    • Apple cider vinegar - Thins the barbecue sauce into a lighter glaze and adds a bright, tangy finish that balances the sweetness.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Tools: You'll need a sturdy pair of kitchen shears or poultry shears to remove the backbone.

    Chef's note: Pellet Grill Setup - I tested this recipe on a Twin Eagles pellet grill using the ceramic briquette insert rather than the solid diffuser, which provides a little more radiant heat for beautifully browned skin. If your pellet grill uses a diffuser or drip tray for indirect cooking, follow the recipe as written and cook the chicken to the recommended internal temperature. Cooking time may vary slightly depending on your grill's heat-management system.s

    How to Cook Smoked Spatchcock Chicken

    Be sure your pellet hopper is full and the grill grates are clean. I use a pure hardwood blend including hickory, cherry, hard maple, and apple woods.

    Whole chicken on a half sheet tray with poultry shears and paper towels.
    1. Trim the chicken of extra fat and skin at both ends. Dry the chicken well with paper towels.
    A chicken, back side up, the center backbone scored with a knife.
    1. Gently score the backbone for a visual guide on where to cut out the backbone.
    Whole chicken with the backbone cut out, called spatchcock chicken.
    1. With kitchen shears, cut along both sides of the backbone and remove.
    A flattened chicken top side up after removing the backbone.
    1. Turn the chicken breast-side up and press firmly on the center of the breastbone until it cracks and the chicken lies flat. Save the backbone to make chicken broth.
    A spatchcocked chicken turned under side up with seasoning on a sheet tray.
    1. Rub the bird lightly with oil top and bottom. Season the underside of the chicken.
    A dry rubbed spatchcock chicken ready for the grill on a rimmed baking sheet.
    1. Turn the chicken over and season the top.
    a whole spatchcocked chicken coated with dry rub on grill grates.

    7. Place the chicken on the pre-heated grates at 375F. Set timer for 45 minutes to check on the progress and glaze if desired. No need to turn the chicken. It cooks skin side up the entire time.

    A smoked spatchcock chicken glazed with BBQ sauce, beautifully bronzed and finished.

    8. Glaze the chicken a few minutes before it is finished with bbq sauce diluted with the ACV. Use a pastry brush. Chicken is done when the breast is 160°F-165° and the thighs are 175°-180°F.

    Smoked spatchcock chicken on a wood cutting board with a carving knife.

    Chef's Tip: While 165°F is the minimum safe temperature for chicken, dark meat is more tender and juicy when cooked to 175-180°F. Because a spatchcock chicken is flattened, it cooks more evenly than a whole upright bird, helping the breast stay moist while the thighs reach their best eating temperature. For this reason, I cook spatchcock chicken to the temperature of the thigh, not the breast. Use a digital thermometer and check the thickest part of the thigh, avoiding the bone.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve smoked spatchcock chicken with classic barbecue sides such as easy coleslaw or no-mayo potato salad. Other good options include corn and black bean salad, simple charro beans (cowboy beans), a green salad, or tomato cucumber salad.

    Leftovers and Storage

    Store leftover smoked chicken in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Strip the meat from the bones before storing. That makes it easier to make chicken salad, taco, or to toss into bowls and salad.

    For longer storage, freeze the cooked chicken in an airtight container or freezer-safe bag for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator before reheating.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long does it take to smoke a spatchcock chicken at 375°F?

    A chicken weighing about 4½ pounds usually takes about 55-70 minutes at 375°F. Pellet grills vary, so begin checking early and use internal temperature rather than time alone to determine doneness.

    What internal temperature should smoked spatchcock chicken reach?

    Cook until the thickest part of the breast reaches 160-165°F and the thigh reaches at least 175-180°F, without touching bone with the thermometer. Rest the chicken before carving for just a few minutes.

    How do you keep smoked chicken skin from becoming rubbery?

    Cook at a higher temperature, such as 375°F, rather than smoking low and slow for several hours. Pat the chicken dry, coat it lightly with oil, and cook it skin-side up with no turning required. Lower smoking temperatures are more likely to produce soft or rubbery skin. For the crispiest skin, skip the glaze; the barbecue glaze adds wonderful flavor and shine but softens the skin slightly.

    More Pellet Grill Recipes

    Here are a few more easy pellet grill recipes to try, from smoked chicken and salmon to other flavorful outdoor-cooking favorites.

    • BBQ glazed smoked pork tenderloin sliced on a gray platter for serving.
      Smoked Pork Tenderloin (pellet grill)
    • A browned, whole smoked turkey breast in a silver platter with bay leaves, potatoes on side,
      Smoked Turkey Breast (Bone-In, No Brine)
    • Smoked baby back ribs being sliced on a sheet tray with BBQ sauce.
      3-2-1 Ribs (Smoked Baby Back Ribs Recipe)
    • Sliced and whole smoked chicken breasts on a gray serving plate.
      Easy Smoked Chicken Breast

    If You Make This Recipe

    If you make this smoked spatchcock chicken, please drop me a comment and let me know how you enjoyed it. I loved hearing from you and your comments also help others readers. Thanks for supporting my site.

    📖 Recipe

    Smoked spatchcock chicken on a wood cutting board with a carving knife.

    Smoked Spatchcock Chicken

    Sally Cameron
    No ratings yet
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 1 hour hr
    Total Time 1 hour hr 10 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 to 5
    Calories 611 kcal

    Equipment

    • Pastry brush for the glaze

    Ingredients
      

    • 4 ½ pound whole chicken
    • ¼ cup barbecue sauce my recipe link below
    • 2-3 tablespoons dry rub my recipe link below
    • 1-2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar
    • 1 ½ tablespoons olive oil or avocado oil

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Spatchcock chicken

    • Remove the chicken from the refrigerator 45-60 minutes before cooking to get the chill off. Trim away any excess skin and fat from both ends, then pat the chicken thoroughly dry with paper towels.
      Place the chicken breast-side down. Using a sharp knife, lightly score a line down the center of the backbone to give you a clear visual guide. With sturdy kitchen or poultry shears, cut along both sides of the backbone and remove it. Save and freeze the backbone for making chicken broth, or discard it.
      Turn the chicken breast-side up and press firmly on the breastbone until it cracks and the chicken lies flat. See the video for additional guidance.

    Set up the grill

    • Preheat your pellet grill to 375°F according to the manufacturer's instructions. Be sure the hopper is full and the grates are clean.

    Prep the chicken

    • Lightly coat the chicken all over with olive oil, then season generously on both sides with salt (if your rub does not contain it) then the dry rub.

    Smoke chicken

    • Place the chicken breast-side up on the grill grates. Close the lid and smoke until the thickest part of the breast reaches 160-165°F and the thigh reaches 175-180°F, 55-70 minutes for a 4½-pound chicken. Cooking time will vary depending on your pellet grill and the size of the bird.

    Glaze the chicken

    • While the chicken cooks, stir together the warmed or room temperature barbecue sauce and apple cider vinegar until smooth. During the last 10-15 minutes of cooking, brush a light coat of the glaze over the chicken. Close the lid and continue cooking until the glaze is set and the chicken reaches the proper internal temperature.

    Rest and carve

    • Transfer the chicken to a cutting board and let it rest for 10-15 minutes before carving and serving.

    Notes

    Here's the link to my homemade BBQ sauce which takes about 5 minutes to make,
     and the link for my all-purpose dry rub, which is what I use on this chicken. It does not contain salt, so salt the bird after the olive oil, then apply the rub.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 611kcalCarbohydrates: 9gProtein: 46gFat: 42gSaturated Fat: 11gPolyunsaturated Fat: 9gMonounsaturated Fat: 19gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 184mgSodium: 356mgPotassium: 521mgFiber: 0.4gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 436IUVitamin C: 4mgCalcium: 53mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Smoked Chicken Thighs

    07/21/2026 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    A platter of smoked chicken thighs with a dark glossy bbq glaze and salad on the side.

    Smoked chicken thighs are one of the easiest, most flavorful meals you can make on a pellet grill or smoker. Bone-in chicken thighs stay naturally juicy and tender, making them a forgiving cut that absorbs delicious smoky flavor. Season them with a dry rub, then finish with your favorite barbecue sauce or glaze near the end for smoky, tender chicken that's perfect for weeknight dinners, backyard cookouts, and weekend barbecues.

    Oval platter of smoked chicken thighs glazed with bbq sauce and a meat fork on the side.

    Chicken thighs are especially good for smoking because the dark meat stays moist, takes on light smoke beautifully, and becomes tender without much fuss. Serve them with classic cookout sides like baked beans, potato salad, coleslaw, corn, or a fresh green salad. Smoke a few extra while the grill is hot because the leftovers are great for sandwiches, wraps, tacos, salads, grain bowls, and quick meals throughout the week.

    Smoked Chicken Thighs Recipe Snapshot

    • Juicy dark meat - Bone-in chicken thighs stay tender and moist on the smoker.
    • Easy smoker recipe - Great for a pellet grill, smoker, or outdoor BBQ setup with a smoke tube.
    • Dry rub flavor - Season with my homemade dry rub or your favorite seasoning blend.
    • Optional glaze - Brush with barbecue sauce for a glossy, flavorful finish.
    • Great leftovers - Use extra smoked chicken in sandwiches, wraps, salads, bowls, or tacos.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Bone-in skin on chicken thighs, dry rub, and bbq sauce for smoked chicken thighs in prep bowls.
    • Chicken thighs - Use bone-in thighs for moist flavorful meat.
    • Seasoning - Use my smoky barbecue rub, blackening seasoning, lemon pepper, or a simple blend of salt, black pepper, garlic powder, and smoked paprika.
    • BBQ sauce - Make my homemade BBQ sauce or use your favorite.

    Chef's Tip: Buying bone-in, skin-on chicken thighs. Thighs contain bones, skin, and fat, so you'll end up with less edible meat than the package weight reads. Plan on 1 to 2 thighs per person, depending on their size and your side dishes. For my husband and me, I usually buy 1½ to 2 pounds, which gives us a satisfying dinner plus leftovers if the thighs are on the larger side, so double that for 4 people.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Swap the barbecue sauce - Try hoisin sauce, teriyaki sauce, honey mustard, or another favorite glaze. Brush it on during the final 10-15 minutes so it sets.
    • Skip the sauce - Leave the thighs dry-rubbed for a smoky, savory finish with crisper skin.
    • Use boneless chicken thighs - Boneless thighs cook faster and work well, but they will not be quite as juicy or deeply flavored as bone-in thighs. Check the temperature earlier.
    • Make them sweeter - Finish the thighs with a maple barbecue glaze, hot honey, or a mixture of barbecue sauce and a little hot honey.

    Chefs tip For pellets - I use a premium all-hardwood blend of hickory, cherry, hard maple, and apple blend.

    How to Make Smoked Chicken Thighs

    Chicken thighs being trimmed of excess fat with a chefs knife.
    1. Turn chicken thighs under side up and trim of excess off skin and fat with a sharp knife.
    A rimmed baking sheet of seasoned bine-in chicken thighs on parchment paper.
    1. Place the thighs on a parchment-lined baking sheet and season both sides well with dry rub.
    Dry rub seasoned chicken thighs on grill grates.
    1. Place the seasoned chicken thighs skin-side up on preheated grill grates at 275°F.
    Smoked chicken thighs almost done, glazed with bbq sauce on grill grates.
    1. During the final 10-15 minutes of cooking, gently dab the sauce onto the chicken thighs with a pastry brush. Use a light touch so you don't disturb the rub or crisp skin. Let the sauce warm, thicken, and set into a glossy glaze.

    Chef's Tip: The Best Temperature for Chicken Thighs. At 275°F, smaller bone-in chicken thighs may take 60-75 minutes, while large thighs, such as 8-ounce thighs, can take close to 2 hours. Chicken thighs are safe to eat at 165°F, but dark meat is more tender and flavorful when cooked to 175°F-185°F. The higher temperature gives the connective tissue and fat more time to break down, creating softer, juicier meat. If the thighs are taking longer than expected and you need to speed things up, increase the smoker temperature by about 25°F and monitor the internal temperature closely. Check the temperature in the thickest part, avoiding the bone.

    A platter of smoked chicken thighs with a dark glossy bbq glaze and salad on the side.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve smoked chicken thighs with classic barbecue favorites like Boston baked beans, red potato salad, fresh coleslaw, grilled corn on the cob, or an antipasto pasta salad. For lighter meals, pair them with a crisp green salad, grilled vegetables, roasted broccoli, or a simple cucumber and tomato salad.

    Leftover smoked chicken thighs are just as versatile. Slice or shred the meat for sandwiches, wraps, tacos, grain bowls, pasta, or salads. They also make an easy protein for meal prep throughout the week.

    Leftovers and Storage

    Store leftover smoked chicken thighs in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Reheat gently in a 300°F oven, air fryer on reheat, or microwave until warmed through.

    For longer storage, freeze cooled chicken thighs in a freezer-safe container or zip-top bag for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator before reheating.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long does it take to smoke chicken thighs?

    At 275°F, bone-in chicken thighs usually take 60-75 minutes, depending on their size and how steadily your smoker holds the temperature. Cook to internal temperature rather than relying only on time. Larger thighs such as 8-ounce thighs will take longer.

    What temperature should I smoke chicken thighs?

    Smoke chicken thighs at 275°F for a good balance of smoky flavor, tender meat, and reasonable cooking time. If you need them done faster, increase the temperature slightly. They'll have a little less smoke flavor but still turn out delicious. If your pellet grill has a Smoke Boost or Super Smoke setting, use it.

    What internal temperature should smoked chicken thighs reach?

    Cook smoked chicken thighs to 175°F-180°F for the most tender, juicy dark meat. Check the temperature in the thickest part without touching the bone.

    When should I add barbecue sauce?

    Add barbecue sauce during the final 10-15 minutes of cooking so it has time to warm, thicken, and set into a glossy glaze. Dab it on gently instead of brushing hard, which can disturb the rub and crisp skin. Avoid using sauce straight from the refrigerator; let it come to room temperature or warm it gently first.

    More Pellet Grill Recipes

    From smoked salsa to turkey, pork, and of course more smoked chicken recipes, be sure to check out the grill & smoker recipe index.

    • Smoked salsa in a tall jar and a small serving glass cup with corn chips
      Easy Smoked Salsa (pellet grill recipe)
    • BBQ glazed smoked pork tenderloin sliced on a gray platter for serving.
      Smoked Pork Tenderloin (pellet grill)
    • A browned, whole smoked turkey breast in a silver platter with bay leaves, potatoes on side,
      Smoked Turkey Breast (Bone-In, No Brine)
    • Smoked baby back ribs being sliced on a sheet tray with BBQ sauce.
      3-2-1 Ribs (Smoked Baby Back Ribs Recipe)

    If You Make Smoked Chicken Thighs

    If you make these smoked chicken thighs, I'd love to hear how they turned out. Leave a comment and rating below-it helps other readers and I enjoy hearing what you're cooking on your smoker.

    📖 Recipe

    A platter of smoked chicken thighs with a dark glossy bbq glaze and salad on the side.

    Smoked Chicken Thighs

    Sally Cameron
    Smoked chicken thighs are juicy, tender, and packed with smoky flavor. Season bone-in thighs with a dry rub, smoke them at 275°F, then brush with barbecue sauce near the end for an easy dinner with a glossy, flavorful finish.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 1 hour hr
    rest 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, main
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 680 kcal

    Equipment

    • Pellet grill, smoker, or gas grill with smoker accessory
    • premium hardwood pellets

    Ingredients
      

    • 3 - 4 pounds bone-in skin on chicken thighs
    • 2 tablespoons dry rub
    • avocado oil spray
    • ⅓ - ½ cup BBQ sauce

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Prepare the grill

    • Pre-heat the pellet grill to 275°F with the smoking diffuser. Check the hopper to be sure it's full of pellets and the grates are clean.

    Trim and season chicken

    • Trim the thighs of excess skin and fat. Season with dry rub, adding salt first if the rub is salt-free.

    Smoke chicken

    • When the grill reaches temperature, place the chicken thighs on the grates and give them a quick spritz of avocado oil spray. Set a timer for 60 minutes.
      At 60 minutes, check the thighs with a digital thermometer. If they are close to 170°F, brush them with warm barbecue sauce and continue smoking for another 10–15 minutes, or until they reach 175°F–180°F. If they are still well below 170°F, continue smoking before adding the sauce. Rest for 10 minutes before serving.
      Note – Large chicken thighs, such as 8-ounce thighs, may take up to 2 hours to reach the proper internal temperature. If any size thighs are taking longer than expected and you need dinner done, increase the smoker temperature by 25°F and watch the internal temperature closely. They will finish faster.

    Notes

    Salt note - if you are using my dry rub recipe, salt the thighs before adding the dry rub as my recipe is salt-free so you control the salt. 
    Yield and serving size – Six large bone-in chicken thighs serve about four people. Plan on 1–2 thighs per person, depending on their size, appetite, and the number of side dishes. Smaller children may need less, while hungry adults or teenagers may want two. It's easy to scale this recipe to more servings. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 680kcalCarbohydrates: 12gProtein: 47gFat: 48gSaturated Fat: 13gPolyunsaturated Fat: 10gMonounsaturated Fat: 20gTrans Fat: 0.2gCholesterol: 283mgSodium: 469mgPotassium: 662mgFiber: 0.4gSugar: 8gVitamin A: 332IUVitamin C: 0.4mgCalcium: 51mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Dijon Mustard Vinaigrette

    07/28/2026 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    Creamy dijon mustard vinaigrette in a glass pitcher with mustard nearby and salad greens.

    This Dijon mustard vinaigrette is bright, tangy, and full of flavor, with Dijon adding just enough body to help the dressing emulsify. Change the character of it easily with different oils, artisan vinegars, or styles of Dijon mustard, and add maple syrup for a lightly sweet maple Dijon vinaigrette variation that is especially good with fall salads, roasted vegetables, chicken, and pork.

    A mini glass pitcher of creamy golden dijon mustard vinaigrette.

    With good Dijon, quality olive oil, and a vinegar you enjoy, this dressing comes together in minutes and tastes far better than bottled. Change the vinegar, use tarragon Dijon, add whole grain mustard for texture, or shake it in a jar or blend it until creamy. It's incredibly versatile, the

    Dijon Mustard Vinaigrette Recipe Snapshot

    • Simple pantry ingredients - Extra virgin olive oil, Dijon mustard, and vinegar.
    • Ready in 2 minutes - Shake it in a jar or blend until creamy.
    • Endlessly adaptable - Change the vinegar, use flavored Dijon, or add whole grain mustard for texture.
    • More than salad dressing - Delicious on salads, grain bowls, vegetables, chicken, fish, roasted potatoes, and more.
    • Better than bottled - Fresh flavor with quality ingredients and no unnecessary additives - clean and simple.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Olive oil, apple cider vinegar, dijon mustard, shallot, and garlic for Dijon vinaigrette.
    • Olive oil - Use a good extra virgin olive oil you enjoy.
    • Vinegar - Try white wine vinegar, white balsamic vinegar, champagne vinegar, or tangy apple cider vinegar.
    • Mustard - Buy a good French Dijon for the best flavor. It adds tang and emulsifies the dressing.
    • Shallot - A little for the savoriness it adds (optional).
    • Garlic - Optional, for a little depth of flavor (optional).
    • Honey - Optional, just a bit to soften the vinegar if needed.

    Chef's Tip: Dijon Does More Than Add Flavor
    Dijon mustard gives this vinaigrette its tangy flavor, but it also emulsifies the vinaigrette so the oil and vinegar blend into a creamy, cohesive dressing. Use a good Dijon; in a simple recipe, quality makes a difference. Here's my favorite brand of Dijon.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Flavored olive oil - Lemon olive oil and basil olive oils are two of my favorites for changing the flavor of this Dijon mustard vinaigrette. Lemon adds brightness, while basil gives it a fresh herbal note.
    • Mustard - Use classic Dijon, tarragon Dijon, or add a spoonful of whole grain Dijon for texture.
    • Vinegar - There are many artisan vinegars to play with when making Dijon mustard vinaigrette, and they all add their own twist.
    • Maple Dijon Vinaigrette
      Add 1-2 tablespoons pure maple syrup and adjust the vinegar to taste for a slightly sweeter dressing that's perfect for fall salads with apples, pears, roasted squash, pecans, and goat cheese.

    Chef's Tip: A simple vinaigrette is one of the best places to taste the personality of a good vinegar. Try making the same recipe with white balsamic, champagne vinegar, a good white wine vinegar, or apple cider vinegar-you'll be surprised how much the flavor changes.

    How to Make a Dijon Mustard Vinaigrette

    Olive oil, vinegar, Dijon mustard, garlic, shallot, and pepper in a jar for dressing.
    1. Add everything to a jar with a tight fitting lid.
    Creamy and bright yellow, Dijon  mustard vinaigrette ready to serve in a glass jar.
    1. Shake well until creamy and emulsified. You can also use a blender.
    Creamy dijon mustard vinaigrette in a glass pitcher with mustard nearby and salad greens.

    Serving Suggestions

    Dijon mustard vinaigrette does much more than dress salads. Its creamy texture and tangy flavor also pair well with fish, grilled shrimp, chicken, roasted vegetables, grain bowls, and steamed or grilled vegetables. Spoon it over steamed salmon, use it as a dressing for chicken salad, seared scallops, or drizzle it over roast asparagus, green beans, air fryer potatoes, or roasted carrots.

    Storage

    Store Dijon mustard vinaigrette in a tightly sealed jar in the refrigerator for up to 1 week. The oil may firm up when chilled, so let the dressing sit at room temperature for 10-15 minutes, then shake or whisk well before serving.

    Recipe FAQs

    What vinegar works best in Dijon vinaigrette?

    White wine vinegar gives the dressing a clean, classic flavor. Champagne vinegar, sherry vinegar, apple cider vinegar, or fresh lemon juice also work well and each creates a slightly different flavor. Unseasoned rice vinegar is another option.

    Can I use Dijon vinaigrette as a marinade?

    Yes. Use it as a short marinade for chicken, fish, or shrimp. Because it contains acid, avoid marinating delicate fish for too long, 20-30 minutes should be plenty of time.

    More Recipes with Dijon

    If Dijon mustard is a pantry stape for you, try some of the recipes with Dijon. I can't live without it!

    • Pale yellow Dijon mustard aioli sauce in a glass jar with a white spoon.
      Dijonnaise (Creamy Mustard Aioli Sauce)
    • Pork tenderloin with creamy mustard sauce close up with a serving fork.
      Roast Pork Tenderloin with Dijon Mustard Sauce
    • A bowl of red potato salad with a creamy dressing and a serving spoon.
      Red Potato Salad Recipe (No Mayo)
    • Open faced egg salad sandwiches topped with capers and herbs on a marble server.
      Healthy Egg Salad

    If You Make Dijon Vinaigrette

    if you make this easy dressing, pease drop me a comment and let me know how you like ti and what you did with it. I love hearing from you and your comments help other readers as well.

    📖 Recipe

    Creamy dijon mustard vinaigrette in a glass pitcher with mustard nearby and salad greens.

    Dijon Mustard Vinaigrette

    Sally Cameron
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 2 minutes mins
    Total Time 2 minutes mins
    Course condiment, Dressing, Salad
    Cuisine French
    Servings 16 Yield 1 cup
    Calories 91 kcal

    Equipment

    • Jar with a tight fitting lid

    Ingredients
      

    • ¾ cup extra virgin olive oil
    • ¼ cup apple cider vinegar or white wine vinegar or other vinegar of choice
    • 2 teaspoons finely chopped shallot optional
    • 1 small garlic clove finely zested

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Add all ingredients to a jar with a tight fitting lid and shake very well until creamy and emulsified.

    Notes

    Store Dijon mustard vinaigrette in a tightly sealed jar in the refrigerator for up to 1 week. The oil may firm up when chilled, so let the dressing sit at room temperature for 10-15 minutes, then shake or whisk well before serving.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1tablespoonCalories: 91kcalCarbohydrates: 0.1gProtein: 0.02gFat: 10gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gSodium: 0.5mgPotassium: 4mgFiber: 0.01gSugar: 0.04gVitamin A: 0.03IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 1mgIron: 0.1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Fresh Pineapple Mango Salsa Recipe

    07/21/2023 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Bowl of bright tropical colored pineapple mango salsa.

    Pineapple mango salsa is a fresh, colorful fruit salsa made with sweet pineapple, ripe mango, crisp red bell pepper, jalapeño, cilantro, and lime juice. Serve it with seafood, grilled chicken, pork tenderloin, tacos, or tortilla chips. It's easy to make, refreshing, and a delicious way to brighten summer meals.

    A glass bowl of tropical fruit salsa with pineapple, mango, peppers, and herbs.

    This pineapple mango salsa was a huge hit in one of my cooking classes, so I'm sharing it with you here. Make a batch while pineapple and mango are at their best. It's vibrant, refreshing, and easy to make.

    Pineapple Mango Salsa Recipe Snapshot

    • No cooking required - Fresh, cool, and perfect for hot summer days.
    • Make-ahead friendly - Prep ahead so the flavors can blend before serving.
    • Versatile - Serve with seafood, grilled chicken, pork, tacos, or chips.
    • Sweet and savory - Juicy pineapple and mango balance lime, herbs, onion, and chile.
    • Colorful and fresh - A bright summer salsa that makes everything look and taste better.

    For another cool, refreshing summer recipe try this tomato summer gazpacho.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for pineapple mango salsa chopped and ready to mix.
    • Pineapple - Use half of a small fresh ripe pineapple, or pre-cut pineapple spears from the produce section. If buying pre-cut fruit, choose spears instead of chunks for better texture and easier cutting.
    • Mango - Choose a ripe, sweet mango that is still firm enough to hold its shape when diced.
    • Onion - Red onion adds color and a savory counterpoint to the sweet fruit, but another onion or shallot works too.
    • Jalapeño pepper - Adds a little fresh heat. Remove the seeds and ribs for milder salsa.
    • Red bell pepper - Adds sweetness, crunch, and beautiful color contrast.
    • Fresh herbs - Fresh cilantro and mint are terrific together in this fruit salsa.
    • Lime juice - Fresh lime juice adds bright acidity to balance the sweetness of the pineapple and mango.

    For measurements, please see the recipe card.

    Chef's Tip: How to buy a mango. Mangoes vary in shape and color by variety, so don't rely on skin color alone. Choose one that yields slightly to gentle pressure and smells fruity and sweet near the stem. If it feels rock hard and has little aroma, let it ripen at room temperature for a few days.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • For more heat - Use a serrano pepper or add a little finely diced red chile.
    • For a milder salsa - Replace the jalapeño with green bell pepper or a mild Anaheim pepper.
    • Add more green - Stir in chopped chives, green onion, or extra fresh herbs.
    • No fresh pineapple? - Use canned pineapple packed in juice or water, not syrup, and drain it well. I've also used frozen, drained and patted dry.
    • Make mango salsa - Omit the pineapple and use about 3 mangoes instead.
    • No mango? - Substitute chopped peaches, nectarines, or strawberries for a different but equally fresh fruit salsa.

    If you like salsas, try this homemade salsa verde recipe made with tomatillos or this sweet and spicy strawberry salsa.

    Chef's Tip: How to choose pineapple. Choose a pineapple with skin that is turning golden yellow rather than mostly green. It should smell sweet at the base and give slightly when gently squeezed. Another clue: tug one of the top leaves. If it releases easily, the pineapple is usually ripe.

    How to Make Pineapple Mango Salsa

    When all of the ingredients are finely chopped and ready, add them to a large bowl with the fresh lime juice. Toss gently to combine, then cover and refrigerate for at least 30 minutes to let the flavors blend. Your fresh pineapple mango salsa is ready to serve.

    Colorful bowl of pineapple, mango, pepper, herbs, and red onion for salsa.

    Serving Suggestions

    Pineapple mango salsa becomes juicier as it sits. If needed, drain off a little liquid before serving.

    • Serve it with crisp tortilla chips as you would smoked tomato salsa or green tomatillo salsa.
    • Spoon it over smoked chicken breast, stovetop seared salmon, grilled shrimp, fish tacos, or grilled flank steak.
    • Add it to rice bowls, tacos, or over cottage cheese for a quick high-protein snack.
    A glass jar of brightly colored pineapple mango salsa.

    Storage

    Store leftover pineapple mango salsa in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4-5 days, though it's best within 2-3 days.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make pineapple mango salsa ahead of time?

    Yes. Make it at least 30 minutes before serving to allow the flavors to blend. For the best flavor and texture, enjoy it within 2-3 days. Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator.

    Can I use canned pineapple for pineapple mango salsa?

    Yes. Use pineapple packed in juice or water rather than syrup. Drain it thoroughly and pat it dry if needed before dicing so the salsa does not become watery. Fresh pineapple gives the best flavor and texture, but canned pineapple works well in a pinch.

    Can I use frozen pineapple?

    Yes. Thaw it completely, drain it well, and pat it dry before dicing. Frozen pineapple releases more moisture than fresh, but it works well when properly dried. I've made this salsa with frozen, thawed pineapple before. If you use only half of a fresh pineapple for one batch, freeze the rest for a future batch.

    More Salsa & Sauce Recipes

    For more fresh summer flavor, try one of these easy recipes next, and check out the Best of Summer recipes index page.

    • A jar of salsa chimichurri of parsley, oregano, olive oil, onion, and vinegar.
      Argentinian Chimichurri Sauce (salsa chimichurri)
    • Smoked salsa in a tall jar and a small serving glass cup with corn chips
      Easy Smoked Salsa (pellet grill recipe)
    • tomatillo salsa verde
      Green Enchilada Sauce with Tomatillos
    • A glass bowl of perfectly diced tomatoes on a cutting board.
      Easy Steps for How to Dice a Tomato

    Did You Make This Salsa?

    If you make this pineapple mango salsa, please leave a comment and let me know what you served it with. I love hearing from you and your comments also help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Bowl of bright tropical colored pineapple mango salsa.

    Pineapple Mango Salsa

    Sally Cameron
    This bright, refreshing, uncooked salsa pairs well with grilled chicken, pork, fish and shellfish. It's also tasty with quesadillas and sandwiches. Save the extra pineapple to freeze for breakfast smoothies or to grill for dessert. For a shortcut, use pre-sliced pineapple and mango available in many stores. Yield, a generous 2 cups salsa.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 20 minutes mins
    Course condiment, Sauce
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8 Yield 3 cups
    Calories 32 kcal

    Equipment

    • Chef's knife
    • Cutting board

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 cup finely chopped pineapple 8 ounces store-cut pineapple
    • 1 cup chopped ripe fresh mango 8 ounces store-cut
    • 2 tablespoons finely chopped red onion
    • 1 small red bell pepper chopped small
    • 1 jalapeno seeded and chopped fine
    • 2 limes juiced
    • 1-2 tablespooons fresh chopped cilantro, mint leaves, or flat leaf parsley or a mix of herbs
    • 1 pinch sea salt

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    If starting with whole pineapple

    • For how to cut up a pineapple see photos in post. With a sharp, heavy knife, cut the top and bottom off of the pineapple. Stand it on the flat bottom end and cut in half vertically top to bottom. Use half for the salsa and save the other half for another use.
      Cut the half into long quarter wedges. Lay a wedge flat on its side and trim off the tough center core. Next, lay the wedge rind side down and run a thin knife close to the rind cutting away the flesh. Cut the long strips again into several long thin slices and dice small. Place in a medium bowl. See photos in post for visual help.

    If starting with pre-cut pineapple

    • Chop the pre-cut pineapple into small even cubes or pieces and add to a medium bowl.

    How to cut up a mango

    • Peel the mango with a sharp vegetable peeler. Cut two mango cheeks off of the wide oval sides with the most flesh, then trim off extra mango from the narrow sides. Chop into small cubes and add to the pineapple. Discard the large oval seed when done. Add to the pineapple in a bowl.
      Note - you can cut the mango the grid method (with the skin on the side pieces), but you'll get finer chopped mango doing it this way.

    Finish the salsa

    • Add the onion and red and green peppers to the bowl. Gently toss salsa and add lime juice, herbs and salt. Taste for flavor and make any personal adjustments preferred.

    Notes

    Pineapple note: A small fresh pineapple weighs about 3 pounds. After trimming, the yield is approximately 1 pound of fresh usable pineapple. You need half, or 8 ounces, for this recipe. Use the rest to make more salsa, freeze for smoothies, or enjoy for dessert. 
    Substitutions:
    For more heat, use a hotter red pepper or green pepper, like a serrano pepper.
    For mild salsa, skip or use a green bell pepper or a mild Anaheim pepper.
    No fresh pineapple? Use canned pineapple packed in water, not syrup, or frozen, thawed and patted dry. You need about 8 ounces after drained. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 0.333cupCalories: 32kcalCarbohydrates: 8gProtein: 1gFat: 0.2gSaturated Fat: 0.03gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.1gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.04gSodium: 6mgPotassium: 102mgFiber: 1gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 560IUVitamin C: 36mgCalcium: 12mgIron: 0.2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Homemade Teriyaki Sauce Recipe

    07/14/2026 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    A rustic bowl of dark brown glossy teriyaki sauce with a spoon.

    Skip the bottle and make your own teriyaki sauce at home in minutes. This homemade teriyaki sauce recipe delivers the perfect balance of savory, sweet, and umami flavors with soy sauce or tamari, real mirin, ginger, garlic, and a touch of sake. Use it as a teriyaki sauce, glaze, or marinade for chicken, salmon, shrimp, vegetables, and more. There's a gluten-free option and soy-free option as well.

    A pottery bowl filled with glossy dark teriyaki sauce dripping off a spoon.

    Traditional Japanese teriyaki is surprisingly simple, often made with just soy sauce, mirin, and sugar. Western-style teriyaki is typically thicker and more robust, with additions like garlic and ginger. After researching traditional and modern versions and testing many different ingredient combinations, I developed this recipe to bring together the best of both styles. The result is a rich, glossy teriyaki sauce that's better than bottled and works as a sauce, glaze, or marinade.

    Teriyaki Sauce Recipe Snapshot

    • Better than bottled - Rich, savory-sweet flavor with real pantry ingredients.
    • Sauce, glaze, or marinade - One recipe with multiple uses.
    • Easy to make - Ready in about 15 minutes.
    • Gluten-free option - Use tamari (wheat-free soy) instead of soy sauce.
    • Authentic flavor - Made with real mirin, ginger, garlic, and sake for depth and balance.
    • Protein variable - Use teriyaki with steak, seafood, pork, chicken, and vegetables.

    Love teriyaki chicken? Use this sauce and my recipe for Teriyaki Chicken Thighs, add veggies and rice and you have another fast and terrific dinner.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for
homemade teriyaki sauce in prep bowls on counter.
    • Soy sauce - Use low-sodium tamari for gluten-free teriyaki sauce, or regular low-sodium soy sauce. For a no-soy sauce, use San-J No-Soy Tamari.
    • Mirin - A Japanese sweet rice wine that gives teriyaki sauce its signature flavor and glossy finish. See notes below.
    • Dry sake - Optional, but adds depth. Buy a mini bottle unless you already drink sake. Find them in the wine section of your store.
    • Brown sugar - Use brown sugar or a monk fruit blend for sweetness.
    • Cornstarch - A small amount creates the glossy, thick texture that helps the sauce cling.
    • Garlic - Fresh cloves, finely chopped or zest with a microplane.
    • Ginger - Use finely grated fresh ginger or ginger puree from a jar.

    Chef's Tip: Real mirin makes a much better teriyaki sauce. Many grocery-store bottles are labeled "aji-mirin," which means "tastes like mirin," but they're often made with glucose syrup or corn syrup instead of traditional ingredients. It's a bit like comparing real maple syrup to pancake syrup; they are not the same. Look for real mirin at better markets, Asian grocers, or online. If you can't find real mirin, see below.

    Variations

    • Honey teriyaki - Add 1 tablespoon mild honey, or use honey in place of the brown sugar.
    • Sesame teriyaki - After the sauce thickens, remove from heat and stir in 1-2 teaspoons toasted sesame oil. Start with 1 teaspoon, taste, and add more if desired.
    • Mirin substitute : For every quarter cup of mirin use the same amount of sake plus 1 tablespoon of sugar, monk fruit blend, or honey.

    For another easy Asian-style sauce, make homemade Hoisin, use it on ribs, Hoisin chicken, and more.

    How to Make Homemade Teriyaki Sauce

    Making teriyaki sauce in a small pan on the stovetop.
    1. Add soy sauce (or tamari), mirin, sake, brown sugar, ginger, and garlic to a small saucepan (2 quart), simmer for 8-10 minutes until reduced to 1 ½ cups.
    Homemade teriyaki sauce at a simmer for thickening the sauce.
    1. Add water and cornstarch to a small bowl and stir smooth. Add the slurry to thicken the teriyaki, sauce, whisking until smooth. Cook 1-2 minutes on low to get rid of any raw starch taste.

    Thickened teriyaki sauce in a small pan on the stove before straining.
    1. The thickened teriyaki sauce when glossy and finished.
    Straining sauce into a glass measuring cup for a smooth sauce.
    1. Strain sauce for smooth teriyaki sauce.
    Finished teriyaki sauce cooling in an ice bath before using.
    1. To use right away, chill in an ice bath till cool.
    Golden brown finished sauce pouring off a spoon into a container.
    1. The finished sauce.

    Instead of lemon, garlic, and Dijon, use this teriyaki sauce for grilled shrimp.

    Glazed teriyaki shrimp, grilled on bamboo skewers with black and white sesame seeds and green onions.

    Serving Suggestions

    Use teriyaki sauce as a glaze, marinade, dipping sauce, or finishing sauce. Brush it over grilled or baked chicken, salmon, shrimp, steak, or tofu, or spoon it over rice bowls and stir-fried vegetables. It's also terrific with chicken thighs, chicken skewers, salmon bowls, shrimp, broccoli, green beans, and roasted vegetables.

    Chef's tip: For quick teriyaki shrimp: Marinate 1 ½ pounds peeled large shrimp in a 6 tablespoons of teriyaki sauce for 15-30 minutes at room temperature. Grill over a hot grill on sprayed bamboo skewers, turning as needed, about 6 minutes total depending on size. Brush with a little more sauce during the last minute so the glaze gets glossy without burning (because of the sugar). Finish with sesame seeds and sliced green onions and serve with extra teriyaki.

    Storage

    Store teriyaki sauce in a clean glass jar or airtight container in the refrigerator for 1-2 weeks. Rewarm gently before using or let stand at room temperatures, as the sauce thickens when chilled, if needed. If it becomes too thick, stir in a splash of water, tamari, or sake to loosen it.

    More Homemade Sauce Recipes

    Check out the Sauce and Condiments recipe page for more ideas.

    • A glass jar of deep red homemade bbq sauce.
      Gluten-Free BBQ Sauce Recipe
    • based Mexican ranchero sauce in a bowl with a wood spoon.
      Ranchero Sauce (Quick Mexican Tomato Sauce)
    • A glass jar of bright orange paprika sauce with a golden spoon and a bag of paprika behind.
      Creamy Paprika Sauce Recipe
    • A jar of salsa chimichurri of parsley, oregano, olive oil, onion, and vinegar.
      Argentinian Chimichurri Sauce (salsa chimichurri)

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this teriyaki sauce recipe, be sure to leave me a comment and let me know what you used it for. I love heating from you and your comments help others readers too.

    📖 Recipe

    A rustic bowl of dark brown glossy teriyaki sauce with a spoon.

    Teriyaki Sauce

    Sally Cameron
    Homemade teriyaki sauce with rich savory-sweet flavor from tamari or soy sauce, real mirin, ginger, garlic, and sake. Use it as a sauce, glaze, or marinade for chicken, salmon, shrimp, vegetables, and more.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Sauce
    Cuisine Asian, Japanese
    Servings 18 Yield 1 ¼ cups (24 tablespoons)
    Calories 31 kcal

    Equipment

    • 2 quart pan

    Ingredients
      

    • ¾ cup low sodium soy sauce or tamari for gluten-free
    • ¾ cup mirin Japanese cooking wine
    • 2 tablespoons dry sake
    • 2 ½ tablespoons brown sugar
    • 2 teaspoons finely chopped ginger or ginger puree in jar
    • 1 teaspoon garlic clove, microplaned into a paste or finely chopped and smeared with the back of your knife.
    • 1 tablespoon cold water for a slurry
    • 1 tablespoon cornstarch

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Add tamari or soy sauce, mirin, sake brown sugar, ginger, and garlic to a small saucepan (2 quart), and simmer until reduced to 1 ½ cup, 8-10 minutes.

    Thicken with the slurry

    • Make a slurry in a small bowl with the cold water and cornstarch. Add to thicken the teriyaki that is simmering, whisking until smooth. Cook 1-2 minutes to get rid of any raw starch taste.
      Sauce will be thickened and glossy. Strain. It is ready to use after cooling, or chill completely and refrigerate for 1-2 weeks.

    Notes

    • Honey teriyaki - Add 1 tablespoon mild honey, or use honey in place of the brown sugar.
    • Sesame teriyaki - Add 1-2 tablespoons toasted sesame oil before cooking for a nutty sesame flavor.
    • Mirin substitute : For every quarter cup of mirin use the same amount of sake plus 1 tablespoon of sugar, monk fruit blend, or honey.
    The sodium level will vary based upon what you use. I use a 50% reduced Tamari (soy sauce), made by San-J, so it is lower than the numbers reflect.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1tablespoonCalories: 31kcalCarbohydrates: 7gProtein: 1gFat: 0.03gSaturated Fat: 0.004gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.02gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.004gSodium: 459mgPotassium: 41mgFiber: 0.1gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 0.02IUVitamin C: 0.1mgCalcium: 5mgIron: 0.2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!


    Corn and Potato Chowder

    06/30/2026 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    White bowl of creamy potato and corn chowder with a gold spoon.

    Corn and potato chowder is a creamy, lighter summer soup made with sweet corn, tender potatoes, leeks, celery, carrots, and herbs. Use fresh corn when it's in season or frozen corn year-round. This hearty chowder is comforting, flavorful, naturally gluten-free, and easy to adapt for dairy-free diets.

    Bowls of corn and potato chowder with chives and red pepper, and a gold spoon.

    Fresh sweet corn makes a delicious corn and potato chowder and is one of the best ways to celebrate summer's bounty. During peak season, buy extra corn, slice the kernels off the cobs, and freeze them for later. When winter rolls around, you'll have sweet summer corn ready for soup. This chowder is also naturally gluten-free with no flour roux; a small cornstarch slurry thickens it at the end while keeping it lighter than traditional flour-thickened chowders.

    Corn and Potato Chowder Recipe Snapshot

    • Creamy and comforting - A cozy soup with a velvety texture that's still light enough for summer.
    • Fresh or frozen corn - Use fresh sweet corn in season or frozen kernels year-round.
    • Tender potatoes - Gold or yellow potatoes become creamy while still holding their shape.
    • Dairy-free adaptable - Make it with half-and-half or canned coconut milk.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Glass prep bowls with ingredients for corn chowder with potatoes.

    Classic chowder is usually hearty, creamy, and built with potatoes, dairy, and often bacon. This corn and potato chowder keeps that traditional comfort-food feel, with flexible options for dairy-free or vegetarian versions.

    • Corn - Use fresh corn on the cob when in season, or frozen corn kernels year-round. I recommend organic corn to avoid bioengineered varieties.
    • Olive oil - Extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil both work well for sautéing.
    • Celery - Adds aromatic base flavor and texture.
    • Carrots - Add natural sweetness and color.
    • Leeks - Milder than onions and wonderful in soups. Slice thinly and rinse well.
    • Garlic - Adds savory depth.
    • Potatoes - Yellow or gold potatoes give the chowder a creamy texture without becoming too starchy, and keeping their shape.
    • Thyme - Fresh thyme leaves are best, but dried thyme works too.
    • Fennel, optional - Fennel pollen or ground fennel adds subtle sweetness and complexity.
    • Bay leaf - Adds background flavor while the soup simmers.
    • Broth - Use low-sodium chicken broth or vegetable broth.
    • Milk - Use half-and-half for classic creaminess, or canned coconut milk for a dairy-free option. It won't taste like coconut in the finished chowder.
    • Cornstarch - Optional, for a slightly thicker, more traditional chowder.
    • Bacon, optional - Add crisp crumbled bacon for a classic chowder flavor, or omit it for vegetarian chowder.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements including salt and black pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Use grilled corn - For extra flavor, use grilled corn kernels in the chowder.
    • Make it dairy-free - Use canned coconut milk instead of half-and-half.
    • Try fennel pollen - If you love fennel, try fennel pollen. It's a potent, hand-harvested form of fennel that's super aromatic. It adds wonderful depth to soups, stews, vegetables, chicken, pork, and rubs.

    Chef's tip: Homemade broth is one of the easiest ways to make soup taste better. If you have time, try my homemade vegetable broth, homemade chicken bone broth, or faster Instant Pot chicken broth.

    How to Make Corn and Potato Chowder

    Prep ahead tip: The chopping takes longer than the cooking, so prep the onion, celery, carrot, and corn ahead of time if desired. Store them covered in the refrigerator. Dice the potatoes just before cooking, as cut potatoes can discolor and turn gray.

    Sautéing celery, carrots, and leeks in a pot.
    1. Heat olive oil in a large pot over medium heat, then add carrots, celery, and leeks. Saute until soft, about 5 minutes.
    Adding bay leaves and thyme leaves to a pot of cooking vegetables for soup.
    1. Add the garlic, bay leaves, thyme, and fennel. Stir for another 1-2 minutes.
    Corn and broth added to a pot for making corn and potato chowder.
    1. Add the corn, potatoes, and broth, bring to a simmer, partially cover, and keep at a low simmer until the vegetables are soft, about 15 minutes. If using bacon, bake or fry the bacon while the soup is simmering.
    Half and half pouring into a pot of soup from a glass bottle.
    1. Add the half and half and heat through. Remove the bay leaves before serving. If you prefer a thicker chowder, whisk 1 tablespoon cornstarch with 1 tablespoons cold water and stir it into the simmering soup. Cook for 1-2 minutes until lightly thickened.
    White bowl of creamy potato and corn chowder with a gold spoon.

    Serving Suggestions

    Corn and potato chowder is hearty enough to serve on its own, but it's especially good with a simple green salad and a slice of toasted gluten-free garlic bread with parmesan cheese.

    Taste before serving - Half-and-half can dull seasoning, so taste the chowder before serving. It may need another pinch of salt or black pepper.

    Brighten the flavor - If the chowder tastes flat, add a few drops of lemon juice or a splash of vinegar to wake up the flavors without making it taste acidic.

    Fresh finish - Top each bowl with chopped parsley, chives, or green onion for fresh color and contrast. Crisp bacon crumbles are delicious too and add a salty, savory finish.

    Three small bowls of corn and potato chowder with crumbled bacon and chives.

    For Garnishes

    • Serve crisp bacon crumbles on the side so guests can add them, or keep the chowder vegetarian.
    • Top with a dollop of basil pesto or fresh chopped herbs, salty parmesan cheese, or grated cheddar.

    Leftovers and Storage

    Store leftover chowder in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Reheat gently on the stovetop over low heat, adding a splash of broth, milk, or half-and-half only if needed to loosen the texture as the chowder thickens in the refrigerator.

    I don't recommend freezing this chowder because the potatoes can become grainy and watery after thawing.

    Recipe FAQs

    What type of potatoes should I use for corn and potato chowder?


    Gold or yellow potatoes work best because they hold their shape, have thin skins, and are less starchy than russets. Red potatoes work too and add nice color and texture.

    Can I add other vegetables or proteins?

    Yes. Add chopped cooked chicken, ham, or crisp bacon to make the chowder heartier. You can also add extra vegetables such as diced bell pepper or zucchini.

    How can I make the chowder vegetarian or vegan?

    Use vegetable broth and skip the bacon. For vegan chowder, use canned coconut milk instead of half-and-half; dilute it with a little broth if you prefer a lighter texture.

    Can I use frozen corn instead of fresh?

    Yes. Frozen corn works well for this chowder. For the best texture, thaw it first and drain off any excess moisture before adding it to the soup. If adding it straight from frozen, simmer a few extra minutes, as the chowder may be slightly looser from the added moisture.

    More Recipes with Corn

    The good thing about corn is you can enjoy it year-round, corn on the cob in summer and frozen corn in the winter. If you have freezer space, buy fresh late-summer corn, slice off the kernels, and freeze them for later.

    • Closeup of corn succotash with red and green peppers and bacon.
      Sweet Corn Succotash with Bacon
    • Cold green bean salad with cherry tomatoes, corn, feta and red onion in a white bowl.
      Cold Green Bean Salad With Tomatoes and Corn
    • Closeup of grilled corn on the cob with herb butter.
      Grilled Corn on the Cob with Garlic Herb Butter
    • Quinoa and corn salad in white bowl with mint and a gold spoon.
      Quinoa Corn Salad with Lemon Vinaigrette

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this corn and potato chowder, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    White bowl of creamy potato and corn chowder with a gold spoon.

    Corn and Potato Chowder

    Sally Cameron
    Golden corn, tender potatoes, vegetables, herbs and spices make a wonderful end-of-summer chowder. Make it dairy-free with canned coconut milk, and it's naturally gluten-free. Make it ahead on the weekend for a busy week ahead. Chowder will hold 4 days in the refrigerator. If you are not vegan and enjoy crisp bacon, it's the perfect garnish.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 35 minutes mins
    Cook Time 25 minutes mins
    Total Time 1 hour hr
    Course chowder, Soup
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6 Yield 2 quarts
    Calories 216 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large soup pot or dutch oven about 5 ½ quarts

    Ingredients
      

    • 5 ears corn on the cob or 4-4 ½ cups frozen corn kernels
    • 1 ½ tablespoons olive oil or avocado oil
    • ¾ cup chopped celery 2 ribs
    • ¾ cup chopped carrots 2 carrots
    • ¾ cup chopped leek 1 small, light and white part only, rinsed of any grit
    • 2 large garlic cloves chopped fine
    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped thyme leaves or 1 teaspoon dried
    • ½ teaspoon fennel pollen or ground fennel optional but delicious
    • ¼ teaspoon smoked or regular paprika optional
    • 2 bay leaves
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 8 ounces gold potato peeled, chopped into small cubes
    • 3 cups chicken broth or vegetable broth
    • 1 cup half and half or 1 15-ounce can coconut milk
    • 1 tablespoon cornstarch for thickening, optional

    Optional Garnish

    • 6-8 strips bacon, cooked and crumbled about ½ pound

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    If starting with fresh corn

    • Husk the corn and remove the silk. Cut each cob in half crosswise. Stand each piece on a flat end and use a sharp knife to slice off the kernels. For out-of-season corn, use thawed frozen corn kernels, drained well. Prep time includes chopping the vegetables and cutting corn from the cob.

    If starting with frozen corn

    • If using frozen corn, thaw it first and drain off any excess moisture. Pat dry if very wet, then proceed with the recipe. Frozen corn works well year-round, but draining helps keep the chowder from becoming too loose.

    Cook the vegetables

    • Pour olive oil into a medium pot over medium heat. When the oil is warm, add the celery, carrots, and leek. Reduce heat to medium-low and cook until softened, 5-7 minutes, stirring occasionally.

    Add aromatics

    • Add the garlic, thyme, fennel, salt, and pepper. Cook 1-2 minutes, stirring.

    Simmer the chowder

    • Add the potatoes, broth, and corn kernels. Simmer gently, stirring occasionally, until the potatoes are tender, about 15 minutes. Keep the chowder at a low simmer, just barely bubbling, so the potatoes hold their shape.

    Finish the chowder

    • Add the half-and-half and heat gently. Taste before serving, as cream can dull seasoning. Add more salt or black pepper if needed. If the chowder tastes flat, add a few drops of lemon juice or white wine vinegar to brighten the flavor.

    Optional thickening

    • For a thicker chowder, whisk 1 tablespoon cornstarch with 2 tablespoons cold water. Stir into the gently simmering soup and cook 1-2 minutes until lightly thickened.

    Optional garnish

    • While the soup simmers, cook bacon until crisp, drain, crumble, and use to top the soup. Garnish with chopped parsley, chives, or green onion if desired

    Notes

    This chowder thickens when refrigerated. You might need a little extra broth to thin it down, or leave it thick. To feed extra hungry mouths, use more broth and make it more of a soup, which will stretch the quantity of servings, as will adding a little protein such as diced ham or chicken. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1.5cupsCalories: 216kcalCarbohydrates: 28gProtein: 7gFat: 10gSaturated Fat: 4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 14mgSodium: 194mgPotassium: 633mgFiber: 3gSugar: 8gVitamin A: 3257IUVitamin C: 18mgCalcium: 85mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Gazpacho (Spanish Chilled Tomato Soup)

    07/28/2016 by Sally Cameron 19 Comments

    tomato gazpacho soup

    On a hot summer day, there's nothing more refreshing than a bowl of Gazpacho-the classic Spanish chilled tomato soup. Made with peak-season tomatoes, crisp cucumbers, onions, and herbs, it's blended smooth for the traditional version, or left a bit chunky, which we enjoy. With olive oil and sherry vinegar for bold, bright flavor, there is no cooking required-and it's as nourishing as it is delicious.

    Bowl of gazpacho andaluz soup with silver spoons and heirloom tomatoes on the side.

    Have you tried gazpacho soup? All I can say is it's fantastic. Refreshing and healthy, it's perfect for hot weather and an excellent use for ripe summer tomatoes. Leave it chunky or puree it smooth. It's up to you. I like it smoothed out just a little as it makes it a bit more satisfying.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Gazpacho Recipe Snapshot

    • Naturally refreshing - Perfect for the hottest summer days when turning on the stove is not an option.
    • Flexible for all diets - Traditionally thickened with bread, but easily adapted with gluten-free bread or almond meal for a grain-free version.
    • A new experience - If you've never tried chilled soup, this vibrant Andalusian classic might just win you over.

    For recipes where diced tomatoes are called for, here's how to perfectly dice tomatoes.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    A colorful array of heirloom tomatoes from red to gold to burgundy, on a gray cutting board.
    • Tomatoes - Ripe summer tomatoes like romas, heirlooms, or beefsteaks all work well. Use what's best and most flavorful.
    • Cucumber - English, Persian, or mini cucumbers all blend smoothly into the soup.
    • Garlic - Use fresh whole garlic cloves for bold, aromatic flavor.
    • Oil - This is the moment for your best fruity extra virgin olive oil.
    • Citrus - Both lemon and lime juice add bright acidity and a fresh lift.
    • Herbs - Parsley, oregano, and chives provide layers of herbal flavor.
    • Vinegar - Red wine vinegar or sherry vinegar are classic choices for depth and tang.
    • Onion - Red onion is slightly sweeter, but yellow, white, or shallots are fine too.
    • Broth - Use a good-quality chicken or vegetable broth, preferably homemade or low or no sodium so you control the levels.
    • Tomato Sauce - Look for no-salt-added sauce to better control seasoning.
    • Breadcrumbs - Use gluten-free breadcrumbs if needed, or swap in almond meal for a grain-free option.

    Chef's tip: Many gazpacho recipes use canned tomato juice but it's very high in sodium. To reduce the sodium, use no-salt-added organic tomato sauce and low sodium broth, and add salt yourself for more control.

    Please see recipe card for measurements.

    In colder weather, make this easy, fast tomato soup from canned tomatoes.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Add spice: For a smoky kick, stir in a pinch of ground chipotle powder (or a little adobo sauce).
    • Gluten-free: Use homemade gluten-free toasted breadcrumbs-they work beautifully for texture and flavor. [Link to your method here.]
    • Vegan: Simply skip the egg and use vegetable broth. Thicken with almond meal or GF vegan breadcrumbs.

    Chef's Tip: What is Gazpacho?
    This wonderful chilled tomato soup is inspired by the traditions of southern Spain, where hot summers call for refreshing, no-cook meals. Classic gazpacho uses peak-season tomatoes, cucumber, garlic, and red onion-all raw-and gets its signature body from blended bread (or almond meal for a gluten-free version). It's finished with good olive oil and a splash of sherry vinegar or red wine vinegar. Served cold and often garnished with chopped hard-boiled egg or diced veggies, it's simple, vibrant, and full of Mediterranean flavor.

    For a homemade tomato marinara recipe that's a snap to make, try my marinara recipe.

    How to Make Gazpacho

    1. Chop tomatoes, squeeze out the extra seeds, and chop the cucumbers. While the ingredient list is a bit long, not to worry. Once all of the ingredients are mixed, puree the gazpacho in a blender or food processor to the texture you prefer.
    2. Puree for a smoother soup or puree half and mix with the chunkier part for more texture. Chill for a few hours before serving. Garnish ideas are in the gazpacho recipe card.

    Make it ahead: gazpacho can be made a day in advance and stored in the refrigerator. The flavors will continue to develop as it chills.

    A large glass bowl of chunky gazpacho soup with tomatoes and veggies before blending.

    Serving Suggestions

    Gazpacho Andaluz is endlessly versatile-enjoy it as a meal, a starter, or even a party appetizer. Here are a few delicious ways to serve it:

    • As a light meal: Serve by the bowl for lunch or a refreshing dinner starter. Add cooked shrimp, hard-boiled eggs, or avocado slices for extra protein and texture.
    • With something hearty: Pair with grilled lemon chicken or shrimp for a balanced summer plate, or serve alongside a quesadilla, sandwich, or gluten-free garlic toast.
    • For entertaining: Pour into shot glasses for gazpacho shooters-a fun appetizer for summer parties or gatherings.
    Glass shooters filled with gazpacho, topped with a shrimp and cucumber garnish with a silver pick.

    Storage

    Gazpacho keeps well for 4-5 days when stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator. The flavors actually improve after a day as they meld. Give it a good stir before serving and enjoy it all week long in different ways. Great for meal prep too.

    If the soup shooter idea looks fun (and it is), try these asparagus soup shooters too. They are terrific chilled.

    A single white bowl of red gazpacho soup on a pale blue napkin with spoons.

    Recipe FAQs

    Do I need to peel the tomatoes for gazpacho?

    Peeling is optional. I prefer to leave the skins on to retain the fiber and nutrients-but if you want a super-smooth gazpacho, you can peel and seed the tomatoes before blending.

    Do I need to cook any ingredients for gazpacho?

    No. Gazpacho is traditionally a no-cook soup made with raw ingredients. That's what gives it such a fresh, vibrant flavor-especially when tomatoes are in peak season.

    How do I choose the right tomatoes for gazpacho?

    Choose ripe, juicy tomatoes for the best flavor. Roma, vine-ripened, or heirloom varieties are all excellent options. The more flavorful the tomato, the better the gazpacho.

    More Delicious Recipes With Tomatoes

    There are so many terrific recipes that feature or include tomatoes! Try some of these, from salsa to salad and soup. Check out this link for more tomato recipe ideas.

    • Smoked salsa in a tall jar and a small serving glass cup with corn chips
      Easy Smoked Salsa (pellet grill recipe)
    • A white bowl of red and gold roasted cherry tomatoes with fresh thyme leaves.
      Garlic Roasted Tomatoes with Thyme
    • Cold green bean salad with cherry tomatoes, corn, feta and red onion in a white bowl.
      Cold Green Bean Salad With Tomatoes and Corn
    • A single bowl of tomato soup with a sprig of rfesh thyme leaves and silver spoon.
      Quick Tomato Soup From Canned Tomatoes

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make Gazpacho, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    gazpacho tomato soup | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Gazpacho Andaluz

    Sally Cameron
    This recipe makes a big batch of soup. It keeps in the fridge for 4-5 days so you can keep enjoying its cool refreshment in hot weather. Serve chunky or pureed, depending on your preference. For a smaller batch, cut it in half.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 20 minutes mins
    Course Soup
    Cuisine spanish
    Servings 8
    Calories 170 kcal

    Equipment

    • Blender, food processor or stick blender

    Ingredients
      

    Tomato Gazpacho Soup

    • 1 hard boiled egg peeled and chopped (skip for vegan)
    • 2 ½-3 pounds ripe tomatoes
    • 3 small Persian cucumbers or 1 large English cucumber
    • 2 large garlic cloves chopped fine
    • ¼ cup finely diced red onion
    • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
    • 1 lemon juiced
    • 1 lime juiced
    • 6 tablespoons sherry vinegar or red wine vinegar
    • 24 ounces low sodium chicken or vegetable broth 3 cups, preferably homemade
    • 1 15-ounce can tomato sauce no salt added preferably
    • ¾ cup breadcrumbs (GF or wheat) or ⅓ cup almond meal
    • ¼ cup finely chopped fresh flat leaf parsley
    • 1 tablespoon finely chopped fresh oregano
    • 2 tablespoons finely chopped chives
    • 2 teaspoons sea salt
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Optional Garnishes

    • Avocado slices
    • Lime wedges
    • Cucumber slices
    • Chopped cilantro
    • Cooked shrimp

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • To prep tomatoes, cut them lengthwise into quarters and cut out the seedy centers, then chop. Do the same with the cucumbers.
    • Place tomatoes and cucumber in a blender or food processor and add add garlic, red onion, olive oil, citrus juices, vinegar, broth, tomato sauce, breadcrumbs, herbs. Add the hard-boiled egg, and chipotle powder if you like a little heat. Season with salt and pepper, to your taste.
    • Puree soup in a blender for about 1 minute to smooth it out. You may need to do it in two batches. Chill at least 4 hours or overnight for flavors to blend.
    • Note - For a chunkier soup, pulse, don't blend, until you reach your preferred consistency, or puree half and leave half chunky to stir together. Soup will keep 4-5 days in the refrigerator. Make a batch Sunday and enjoy all week.

    Notes

    For paleo, skip the breadcrumbs and use almond meal. For vegan, skip the hardboiled egg and use the almond meal to thicken. 
    Shooters take about 2-3 ounces each if using as an appetizer. Bowls are 8-12 ounces each, so servings will vary depending on use.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 170kcalCarbohydrates: 21gProtein: 5gFat: 8gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 20mgSodium: 629mgPotassium: 587mgFiber: 3gSugar: 9gVitamin A: 1461IUVitamin C: 33mgCalcium: 58mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Gluten-Free Angel Food Cake

    06/25/2026 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    A slice of angel food cake on a plate with whipped cream, strawberries, and blueberries.

    Gluten-free angel food cake is a light, airy sponge cake with a delicate texture and subtle sweetness. Made from whipped egg whites and no added fat, it's one of my favorite summer desserts, especially topped with fresh berries and whipped cream. This gluten-free angel food cake is made completely from scratch-no boxed mix needed-and bakes up tall, tender, and cloud-like.

    A slice of angel food cake topped with whipped cream, berries on the side, cake behind.

    Angel food cake has been one of my favorite cakes since childhood. It was my traditional birthday cake growing up, and this year I baked one for my husband's birthday, which reminded me how much I love this classic dessert. Whether you serve it plain, dusted with powdered sugar, topped with berries and whipped cream, or dressed up with frosting, it's an elegant cake that's surprisingly easy to make once you know a few key techniques.

    Gluten-Free Angel Food Cake Recipe Snapshot

    • Light and airy - Classic angel food cake with a tender, cloud-like texture.
    • Made from scratch - No boxed mix, just real ingredients and proper technique for a gluten-free angel food cake.
    • Great for summer - Perfect with whipped cream, fresh berries, or powdered sugar.
    • Make-ahead friendly - Bake a day ahead and keep it covered until ready to serve.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Gluten-free angel food cake ingredients in prep bowls on a kitchen counter.
    • Flour - Use gluten-free flour without xanthan gum. I tested this recipe with King Arthur Gluten-Free All-Purpose Flour, not Measure for Measure. Other gluten-free flour blends may work, but I have not tested them.
    • Cornstarch - Lightens the flour blend and helps create a tender, delicate crumb.
    • Egg whites - The structure of angel food cake. Use room-temperature fresh or frozen-thawed egg whites for the best volume. I have not tested this recipe with carton egg whites. Because they are pasteurized, I do not recommend them for maximum volume.
    • Sugar - Superfine sugar works best because it dissolves easily into the meringue. Buy it or make your own; see the tip below.
    • Extracts - Vanilla extract plus a little almond extract gives classic angel food cake flavor, and the combination of flavors is fantastic.
    • Cream of tartar - Stabilizes the whipped egg whites so they hold their structure.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, and salt.

    Chef's Tip: Superfine sugar helps angel food cake achieve its light, delicate texture. I've never found an organic superfine sugar, so I make my own. Process granulated sugar for about 10 seconds in a high-speed blender, or 15-30 seconds in a food processor, until it resembles fine sand. Do not over-process or you'll have powdered sugar. If you prefer, you can buy regular superfine sugar.

    What to Do With Extra Egg Yolks

    Angel food cake uses a lot of egg whites, so save the extra yolks for another recipe and use within 2-4 days. Make vanilla custard ice cream, lemon curd, homemade mayonnaise, or crème brûlée.

    Tips for Gluten-Free Angel Food Cake Success

    • Use an ungreased pan - Angel food cake needs to cling to the sides of the pan as it rises. Greasing the pan can cause it to slip and collapse.
    • Measure carefully - For the most accurate results, weigh the gluten-free flour and cornstarch. If measuring by cups, whisk the flour first to lighten it, then gently scoop and level without packing.
    • Sift well - Sift the gluten-free flour and cornstarch twice so the mixture is light, fine, and easy to fold into the egg whites.
    • Separate cold, whip warm - Separate eggs while cold because the yolks are firmer and less likely to break. Then let the egg whites come to room temperature before whipping for better volume.
    • Keep everything grease-free - Egg whites won't whip properly if there is any fat, oil, or egg yolk in the whites, bowl, whisk, or pan.
    • Whip to medium peaks - The meringue should be glossy and hold its shape, but not look dry, stiff, or clumpy.
    • Bake on a lower oven rack - The lower third of the oven gives the tall pan room to rise and helps prevent over-browning.
    • Cool upside down - Invert the pan immediately after baking and cool completely upside down so the cake keeps its height and airy texture. If your pan does not have feet, place the center tube over a sturdy bottle or funnel but don't let the cake touch the counter.
    Gluten angel food cake with tilted slices on a cake plate.

    How to Make a Gluten-Free Angel Food Cake

    Preheat the oven to 350°F and set the oven rack to the bottom third, or just under center.

    Sugar in a blender being refined into superfine sugar.
    1. If making superfine sugar, process 2-3 cups of sugar about 10 seconds until it is like fine sand. Keep extra labeled as superfine for other baking needs. Don't over-process or you will have powdered sugar.
    A dozen eggs whites in a stainless steel mixing bowl with whisk attachment.
    1. Add room temperature egg whites to the bowl of a stand mixer fitted with the whip attachment. Beat until foamy, add cream of tartar and salt.
    Whipping egg whites in a standing mixer bowl with whip attachment.
    1. Keep whipping egg whites to medium peaks on a medium speed.
    Adding sugar to whipped eggs white for angel food cake batter in a workbowl.
    1. When whites reach medium peak, begin to add the sugar a few tablespoons at a time, until all sugar is in.
    White angel food cake batter with a stainless steel wire whip attachment in a mixing bowl.
    1. This is what the meringue will look like when ready for the next step, glossy and holding its shape. Beat in the vanilla and almond extracts.
    Folding flour into angel food cake batter by hand.
    1. By hand with a large flexible spatula, gently fold in the flour, in 3-4 batches., so as not to deflate the meringue.
    Spooning meringue cake batter into a silver tube cake pan.

    7. Scrape the batter into the un-greased tube cake pan and smooth the top.

    Running a table knife through cake better to release any bubbles.

    8. Run a thin table knife through the batter and around the edges to release any large air pockets.

    Finished angel food cake batter smoothed into the tube cake pan ready to bake.

    9. Smooth top again if needed.

    A golden baked angel food cake still in the pan.

    10. Bake for 35-45 minutes until the top is golden brown, dry, and springs back when touched.

    An angel food cake inverted on the counter, cooling, in a silver tube pan.

    11. Immediately invert the cake and cool completely, about 2-3 hours. Do not attempt to slice it while warm.

    Removing the cake from the bottom of the pan with a large metal spatula.

    12. Remove the cake from the pan with a long thin knife or offset spatula, then invert onto a cake plate. Serve angel food cake bottom-side up. A few small holes or air pockets are normal.

    Chef's Tip: Freeze leftover egg whites to make angel food cake
    If you make custards, ice cream, pastry cream, or lemon curd where you use just the yolks, freeze the extra egg whites for angel food cake. They work great. Freeze them in a labeled airtight container. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator or faster in a sealed container set in cold water, changing the water every 20-30 minutes, then bring to room temperature before whipping for best volume.

    A slice of angel food cake on a plate with whipped cream, strawberries, and blueberries.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve this homemade gluten-free angel food cake plain, dusted with powdered sugar, or topped with whipped cream and fresh berries. It's also lovely with sliced strawberries, blueberries, raspberries, or lemon curd. Berry sauces work well too, such as raspberry sauce, or strawberry coulis.

    For clean slices, use a serrated knife and a gentle sawing motion so you don't compress the cake's light, airy texture.

    How to Store Gluten-Free Angel Food Cake

    Store angel food cake covered at room temperature for 1-2 days, or refrigerate for up to 4 days. Keep it well covered so it doesn't dry out.

    For longer storage, freeze slices tightly wrapped for up to 2 months. Thaw at room temperature before serving.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make gluten-free angel food cake ahead of time?

    Yes. Gluten-free angel food cake is best made the day before or the morning of serving. Store it covered at room temperature for 1-2 days, or refrigerate for up to 4 days.

    Can I use carton egg whites for angel food cake?

    I don't recommend carton egg whites for this recipe. Because they are pasteurized, they usually don't whip as high or hold as much volume as fresh or frozen-thawed egg whites.

    Why did my angel food cake fall?

    Angel food cake can fall if the pan is greased, the egg whites are over-whipped or under-whipped, the flour is folded in too aggressively, or the cake is not cooled upside down completely.

    Can I freeze gluten-free angel food cake?

    Yes. Wrap slices tightly and freeze for up to 2 months. Thaw at room temperature before serving.

    What is the best pan for angel food cake?

    Use an un-greased tube pan with a removable bottom. The batter needs to cling to the sides of the pan as it rises, and the center tube helps the cake bake evenly.

    More Cake Recipes

    Love to bake cakes? No one would ever guess these cakes are gluten-free.

    • Strawberry shortcake cake with fresh strawberries and whipped cream on a golden sponge cake.
      Gluten-Free Strawberry Shortcake Cake
    • Sliced of golden pound cake with strawberries and a small bowl of whipped cream.
      Gluten Free Pound Cake with Cream Cheese
    • Carrot cake with cream cheese frosting and chopped nuts on a plate with a fork.
      Gluten-Free Carrot Cake
    • A golden slice of lemon olive oil cake, made wit whole almonds, served with berries and glaze.
      Super Moist Lemon Olive Oil Cake Recipe

    If You Make This Recipe

    If you make this angel food cake, please drop me a comment and let me know how you served it. I love hearing from you and your comments help other readers too. Thanks for supporting my site.

    📖 Recipe

    A slice of angel food cake on a plate with whipped cream, strawberries, and blueberries.

    Gluten-Free Angel Food Cake

    Sally Cameron
    Light, airy gluten-free angel food cake made from scratch. Serve plain or with whipped cream, fresh berries, berry sauce, lemon curd, or ice cream for a classic summer dessert. Frosting works too.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 25 minutes mins
    Cook Time 40 minutes mins
    cooling time 3 hours hrs
    Total Time 4 hours hrs 5 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 10
    Calories 161 kcal

    Equipment

    • Angel food cake pan
    • Stand mixer 5-7 quart size
    • large flexible spatula
    • Offset spatula optional but handy
    • Serrated knife

    Ingredients
      

    • ¾ cup all purpose gluten-free flour blend without xanthan gum, I use King Arthur
    • ¼ cup cornstarch
    • 1 ½ cups superfine sugar
    • 1 ½ teaspoons cream of tartar
    • ¼ teaspoon fine sea salt
    • 1 ½ teaspoons vanilla extract
    • ½ teaspoon almond extract

    Optional toppings

    • 1 pint heavy whipping cream
    • 1 ½ teaspoons vanilla extract
    • 2 tablespoons superfine sugar or powdered sugar
    • strawberries and blueberries

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Sift flour and cornstarch

    • Pre-heat the oven to 350°F. Sift the flour and the cornstarch together twice so it is very fine and folds into the egg whites easily.

    Make superfine sugar (if needed)

    • If making superfine sugar, process granulated sugar for about 10 seconds in a high-speed blender, or 15-30 seconds in a food processor, until it resembles fine sand. Do not over-process or you'll have powdered sugar.

    Whip the egg whites

    • Add room-temperature egg whites to the bowl of a standing mixer (5-6 quarts) fitted with the whisk attachment. Beat until foamy, then add the cream of tartar and the salt.

    Build the meringue

    • Continue beating until soft peaks form. Gradually add the sugar, a few tablespoons at a time. Beat until the meringue is glossy with medium peaks. Beat in the vanilla and almond extract.

    Fold in the flour

    • Gently fold the sifted flour mixture into the egg whites in several additions with a large flexible spatula, using a light hand so you don't deflate the batter.

    Fill the pan, release air pockets

    • Spoon the batter into the un-greased angel food cake pan. Smooth the top. Run a thin table knife through the batter and around the inner and outer edges to release large air pockets. A few small holes are normal with angel food cake. Smooth top again if needed.

    Bake the cake

    • Bake until the cake is golden, dry on top, and springs back when lightly touched, about 35-45 minutes.

    Cool upside down

    • Immediately invert the pan and cool completely upside down. Use the pan's feet, or place the center tube over a sturdy bottle or funnel. Cooling upside down helps the cake maintain its height and airy texture. Plan on 2-3 hours for total cooling.

    Remove from the pan

    • Once completely cool, run a thin knife around the inside outer edge of the cake and center tube. Lift cake out of the pan by the center tube. With a long spatula or long thin knife, separate the cake from the bottom of the pan.
      Slice with a serrated knife. A tomato knife or small bread knife works great. Serve topped with lightly sweetened whipped cream and berries if desired.

    Notes

    Mixer note - This is a large-volume batter made with 12 egg whites. A stand mixer with at least a 5-quart bowl is strongly recommended; a 6-quart bowl is ideal. A hand mixer can work only if you have a very large, deep bowl, but it will take longer and be harder to manage. 
    Egg white note – Twelve large egg whites are usually about 1½ cups, or roughly 360 grams. Since egg sizes vary, measuring the whites gives the most consistent result.
    Serve with lightly sweetened whipped cream flavored with a little vanilla extract, and fresh berries. lemon curd is good too. 
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 161kcalCarbohydrates: 40gProtein: 1gFat: 0.4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.1gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.1gSodium: 59mgPotassium: 76mgFiber: 1gSugar: 30gCalcium: 7mgIron: 0.4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Grilled Corn on the Cob with Garlic Herb Butter

    07/28/2023 by Sally Cameron 5 Comments

    Closeup of grilled corn on the cob with herb butter.

    Grilled corn on the cob is the unmistakable taste of summer: sweet, juicy, lightly charred, and full of fresh corn flavor. If you've never tried it, I'll show you how to grill corn on the cob so it turns out tender and flavorful every time. Finish it with garlic herb butter and keep plenty of napkins nearby-this easy summer side dish is guaranteed to disappear fast.

    A pewter platter of golden grilled corn with herb butter.

    Boiled corn is classic, but grilled corn on the cob takes summer corn to another level. Some recipes wrap the corn in foil or grill it in the husk, but I prefer placing the ears directly on hot grill grates. It's simple, less messy, and gives the kernels a little char for the best grilled corn flavor. Finish with garlic herb butter and it's heavenly.

    Grilled Corn on the Cob Recipe Snapshot

    • Super easy - Fresh corn goes straight on the grill grates, no foil or husks needed.
    • Sweet, smoky flavor - Grilling caramelizes the corn's natural sugars and adds a little char.
    • Garlic herb butter - The easy compound butter is terrific on corn and works with other vegetables too. Plain melted butter works too.
    • Any grill works - Make it on a gas grill, charcoal grill, or pellet grill.

    Make a few extra ears of grilled corn on the cob, slice the corn kernels off the corn cobs, and make this terrific tomato, green bean, and corn salad

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Really all you need it fresh corn on the cob and a little olive oil, but the garlic herb butter so delicious! Summer is peak season for fresh corn, a great time to make grilled sweet corn.

    Ingredients for grilled corn on the cob.
    • Corn on the cob - Buy the freshest corn possible. Use pre-shucked corn for ease, or buy ears in the husk and clean them yourself.
    • Oil - Brush the corn lightly with olive oil or avocado oil before grilling.
    • Butter - Use unsalted butter for the garlic herb butter, or salted butter and skip the added salt. Good butter really shines here.
    • Herbs - Fresh herbs are best, but dried herbs work in a pinch. Try parsley, cilantro, chives, thyme, rosemary, or your favorite combination.
    • Garlic - Use fresh garlic or granulated garlic. If using fresh, grate it finely with a microplane so it blends smoothly into the butter.

    For measurements and seasoning please see the recipe card.

    Chef's Tip - How to Buy Fresh Corn:
    Choose ears that feel firm and slightly damp, with bright green husks wrapped tightly around the corn. The silks can be a little brown at the top, but avoid corn with black, dry, or shriveled silks. Store corn in a plastic produce bag in the crisper drawer and use within 2-3 days. As corn ages, its natural sugars turn to starch, so it becomes less sweet. For the best flavor, grill it as soon as possible.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Add cheese - Sprinkle hot grilled corn with finely grated Parmesan or cotija.
    • Mexican street corn style - Brush with a little mayo or crema, then add cotija, chili powder or Tajín, lime juice, and cilantro.
    • Spiced herb butter - Add cumin, coriander, smoked paprika, or lime zest to the garlic herb butter.
    • Dry rub finish - Sprinkle grilled corn with your favorite multipurpose dry rub, smoked paprika, or taco seasoning.

    How to Grill Corn on the Cob

    First, shuck your corn on the cob and brush off the silk. A soft toothbrush works great. Be sure the grill grates are clean and ready to go.

    Ingredients for garlic herb butter in a glass bowl.
    Step 1: Make herb and garlic butter. Add soft butter, salt, garlic powder and herbs to a bowl.
    A bowl of creamy yellow garlic herb butter.
    Step 2: Mix smooth to create the garlic herb butter with a fork or flexible spatula.
    A tray with tongs, pastry brush, olive oil and the shucked corn cobs for grilling.
    Step 3: Put your grill set up together, get ready to make corn on the cob on the grill. Brush the corn on the cob with olive oil. Pure olive oil spray works too.
    Four golden ears of corn on the cob on the grill.
    Step 4: Grill corn on the cob on a medium-hot grill for about 15-20 minutes, turning occasionally, until lightly charred and tender. Remove the corn to the tray and brush with the garlic herb butter. Timing will depend on your grill and the heat setting.

    Serving Suggestions

    Grilled corn on the cob is the perfect summer side dish for grilled chicken, seafood, steak, burgers, ribs, and barbecue. Serve it hot off the grill with garlic herb butter, plain melted butter, or a squeeze of fresh lime.

    Closeup of grilled corn on the cob with herb butter.

    Recipe FAQs

    Is it better to grill corn in foil or not?

    It's personal preference, but I prefer grilling corn directly on the grates. Direct heat gives the corn light char and caramelization. Foil works, but the corn steams more than grills.

    Do you grill corn with lid open or closed?

    Grill corn with the lid closed, turning the cobs every few minutes so they cook evenly and get lightly charred.

    Can you grill pre-shucked corn?

    Absolutely. Pre-shucked corn saves time and mess, though it usually costs more. To prep ahead, shuck the corn, wrap it well, and refrigerate until close to grilling time.

    Do I need to soak corn before grilling?

    No. Soaking is usually for grilling in the husk. For direct grilling, just peel and go.

    Try These Summer Salads With Corn

    What else to do with fresh summer corn? Make dairy-free creamy corn chowder. Grill extra corn and use it in the corn succotash, recipe link below.

    • Bright colored avocado , black bean, and corn salad with tomatoes and jalapenos in a white bowl.
      Black Bean Avocado and Corn Salad
    • Closeup of corn succotash with red and green peppers and bacon.
      Sweet Corn Succotash with Bacon
    • Quinoa and corn salad in white bowl with mint and a gold spoon.
      Quinoa Corn Salad with Lemon Vinaigrette
    • Cold green bean salad with cherry tomatoes, corn, feta and red onion in a white bowl.
      Cold Green Bean Salad With Tomatoes and Corn

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make grilled corn on the cob, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Closeup of grilled corn on the cob with herb butter.

    Grilled Corn on the Cob with Garlic Herb Butter

    Sally Cameron
    The All-American summer staple, corn on the cob, is terrific when grilled. The heat of grilling intensifies the sweetness of the corn. Smear with a soft garlic herb butter to serve (makes extra). Recipe doubles and triples easily. To save time buy pre-shucked corn.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 22 minutes mins
    Total Time 32 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 185 kcal

    Equipment

    • half sheet tray
    • Pastry brush
    • Parchment paper

    Ingredients
      

    Garlic herb butter (makes extra)

    • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter, room temperature sub coconut butter or plant butter, note below.
    • 1 tablespoon finely chopped fresh parsley
    • 1 tablespoon finely chopped fresh thyme, rosemary or mint
    • ¼ teaspoon granulated or powdered garlic or 1 small fresh clove, zested very fine
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt

    Corn

    • 4 large ears fresh corn on the cob preferably organic, see links below
    • 1-2 tablespoons olive oil

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Start by making your butter. Be sure it's a room temperature before you start. If it's cold, place in the microwave on a very low heat setting for 15-20 seconds until soft, but do not melt it. Combine butter through salt (if using) until smooth. If using at a later time, refrigerate until before serving. Let it stand a little while at room temperature so it spreads easily while the corn is hot.
    • To clean corn, peel husks back like a banana peel. Strip off the corn silk and discard. A soft toothbrush works great to clean off the silk. Trim end if needed with a sharp knife.
    • Heat up the grill to high and clean the grates with a grill brush. Brush ears with a little olive oil. Place cobs on grill and close lid. Check and turn ever few minutes with a pair of tongs. You want even charring or blackened kernels on all side. How much is up to you. It takes around 22-25 minutes over all. Serve hot, smeared with spiced herb butter.

    Notes

    If you are in the cilantro-hater club, use fresh Italian parsley or another fresh herb of your choice. Fresh thyme, mint, chives, all work nicely. 
    Timing for how long to grill corn will depend on your grill and setting. I use the high setting on my pellet grill or gas grill, around 400°F - 450°F. 
    For the garlic herb butter, if you are using salted butter, omit the salt in the recipe. I prefer unsalted butter so I control the saltiness. 
    Nutritional calculation includes all of the garlic herb butter, but you probably won't use it all. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 185kcalCarbohydrates: 1gProtein: 0.4gFat: 21gSaturated Fat: 11gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 45mgSodium: 149mgPotassium: 26mgFiber: 0.3gSugar: 0.1gVitamin A: 695IUVitamin C: 4mgCalcium: 14mgIron: 0.4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    French Lentil Quinoa Salad

    05/27/2018 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    A white bowl of lentil quinoa salad with basil leaves and a serving spoon.

    This French lentil quinoa salad is a colorful, hearty mix of tender French green lentils, fluffy quinoa, crisp vegetables, fresh herbs, feta, pine nuts, and sweet-tart pomegranate seeds or dried cranberries. Tossed with a bright lemon vinaigrette, it's a high-protein, high-fiber salad that's perfect for healthy lunches, summer meals, potlucks, and meal prep.

    A white bowl of lentil quinoa salad with basil leaves and a serving spoon.

    This lentil quinoa salad started as a post-workout lunch, built from what I had in the refrigerator: cooked lentils, quinoa, crunchy vegetables, herbs, feta, and a bright lemon vinaigrette. It turned out so good I made it again, then again, and finally decided it deserved to be shared with you. It's one of those salads I'm happy to eat for lunch several days in a row.

    Lentil Quinoa Salad Recipe Snapshot

    • Meal prep friendly - Make it ahead for easy lunches all week.
    • Cool and refreshing - Crisp vegetables, fresh herbs, and lemon vinaigrette keep it bright.
    • High in protein and fiber - Lentils and quinoa make it hearty and satisfying.
    • Full of texture - Crunchy vegetables, creamy feta, pine nuts, and sweet-tart pomegranate seeds in every bite.

    For another favorite quinoa salad, try this one with quinoa salad grilled corn and herbs. 

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for a lentil quinoa salad in prep bowls on a counter ready to go.
    Extra virgin olive oil, lemon juice, dijon mustard, and garlic for a lemon vinaigrette.

    Lentil Quinoa Salad

    • Quinoa - White quinoa or a tri-color blend. Cook and cool before assembling.
    • Lentils - French green lentils (aka Puy lentils) are my preferred choice because they hold their shape well in salads. You can cook your own or use ready-to-eat cooked lentils.
    • Celery - Adds crunch and savory base flavor.
    • Carrots - Add sweetness, color, and crunch.
    • Cucumber - Persian, mini, or English cucumber all work well.
    • Fruit - Use pomegranate seeds or dried cranberries for a sweet-tart pop.
    • Nuts - Pine nuts are my first choice, but chopped walnuts work too.
    • Cheese - Feta cheese, especially Greek feta for more tang, or goat cheese are both delicious. Tiny perline mozzarella work too.
    • Shallot - Adds delicate onion flavor; red onion works too.
    • Fresh herbs - Mint and thyme add fresh, garden-like flavor.

    Lemon Vinaigrette

    • Olive oil - Use a nice fruity extra-virgin olive oil here.
    • Lemon juice - Adds fresh, bright acidity to balance the oil.
    • Mustard - Creamy Dijon adds flavor and helps emulsify the dressing.
    • Garlic - Fresh garlic cloves are best, but garlic puree in a tube works too.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, black pepper, and red pepper (optional).

    Chef's Tip: For this recipe, you'll need 2 cups cooked lentils. If cooking your own, start with about ¾ cup dried French green lentils. If using vacuum-sealed cooked lentils, such as Trader Joe's or Melissa's, they look compressed when opened. Gently break them apart and fluff them before adding to the salad. Using disposable gloves makes it easier.

    Substitutions and Variations

    Use these ideas to change up lentil quinoa salad to make it work for you:

    • Dairy-free or vegan - Skip the cheese, or use a vegan cheese substitute.
    • Change the dressing - Use French vinaigrette, or Balsamic vinaigrette.
    • Nut-free - Skip the pine nuts or walnuts, try seeds instead. Toasted pepitas are good.

    Chef's tip on cucumbers: For the best texture, slice cucumbers into quarters lengthwise, then trim away the seedy centers before chopping. Removing the seeds reduces excess moisture and helps keep the salad crisp instead of watery.

    For another terrific quinoa salad recipe try this gluten-free quinoa tabbouleh.

    How to Make Lentil Quinoa Salad

    A colorful mix of lentils, quinoa, carrots, pomegranate seeds, herbs and ore for a salad in a glass mixing bowl.
    1. Make the lemon vinaigrette in a jar or small bowl.
    2. Add the cooked quinoa and lentils to a large bowl.
    3. Add the chopped vegetables, shallot, herbs, feta, pomegranate seeds, and pine nuts.
    4. Pour the vinaigrette over the salad and toss gently to combine.
    5. Serve chilled or at room temperature.
    A lentil quinoa salad in a mixing bowl ready to be dressed for serving.

    Serving and Make-Ahead Tips

    Lentil quinoa salad can be served chilled or at room temperature. Enjoy it as a side dish or turn it into a satisfying main-course salad by adding protein grilled or roast chicken, grilled shrimp, flank steak, or steamed salmon.

    For meal prep, store the salad and vinaigrette separately in airtight containers and combine just before serving. The salad keeps well for several days, making it a great make-ahead lunch option.

    Brightly colored lentil salad in glass jars on a tray with forks.

    Storage

    Store leftover lentil quinoa salad in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. If possible, store extra vinaigrette separately and toss with the salad before serving.

    More Great Salad Recipes

    For a great picnic packable recipe try this Greek pasta salad or my three bean salad. And don't miss the salad index page for all kinds of salad ideas!

    • A close up of tabouli salad with tomatoes and green onion in a white bowl.
      Tabouli Salad Recipe (Tabbouleh)
    • Gluten-free pasta salad with tomatoes, cucumber, pine nuts, herbs, and more.
      Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe
    • Tomato and cucumber salad, with red onion, feta, and garbanzo beans with greek dressing.
      Cucumber Tomato and Feta Salad (Greek Salad)
    • Mediterranean potato salad
      French Potato Salad

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this lentil quinoa salad, please drop me a comment and let me know how you enjoyed it. I love hearing from you and your comments help other readers too. Thanks for supporting my site.

    📖 Recipe

    A white bowl of lentil quinoa salad with basil leaves and a serving spoon.

    Lentil Quinoa Salad with Lemon Vinaigrette

    Sally Cameron
    Crisp and crunchy with lots of vegetables, protein, and garden herbs, this salad is a great main course on its own or side dish along side chicken or seafood. It transports well for picnics and potlucks or lunch at work or school. Skip the feta cheese for vegan or non-dairy preferences.  Recipe halves easily for 3-4 servings.
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 30 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Main Course, Side Dish
    Cuisine Mediterranean
    Servings 7 1 cup servings
    Calories 221 kcal

    Equipment

    • French whisk or a lid with a tight fitting lid to shake dressing
    • Large mixing bowl

    Ingredients
      

    Salad

    • 2 cups cooked, cooled quinoa tri-color or white
    • 2 cups cooked, cooled green lentils homemade or ready-to-eat steamed lentils
    • 2 ribs celery chopped fine
    • 2 carrots chopped fine
    • 2 Persian or mini cucumbers chopped fine
    • ½ cup pomegranate seeds
    • ¼ cup pine nuts
    • 2-4 ounces feta cheese crumbled or chopped into small cubes
    • 1 medium shallot chopped fine, or red onion
    • 8 large mint leaves chopped fine
    • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme leaves

    Lemon Vinaigrette Dressing

    • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 2 tablespoons fresh squeezed lemon juice
    • ¾ teaspoon Dijon mustard
    • 1 small garlic clove finely chopped and smeared or zested
    • 2 pinches sea salt
    • 2 pinches ground black pepper
    • pinch sugar or a little honey optional if too tangy

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Once your vegetables are chopped and prepped, this salad goes together in a snap. Add all salad ingredients to a large bowl and mix gently. Whisk the vinaigrette ingredients together in a small bowl and toss with the salad. Add any additional salt, pepper or fresh lemon juice for your taste preference.

    Notes

    Look for ready-to-eat cooked lentils in the refrigerated produce area of your market to make this recipe fast and easy. Find them at Trader Joe's and by Melissa's Produce. One package has more than you need. 
    Cooking quinoa: For 2 cups cooked quinoa, start with ¾ cup dry quinoa (rinsed through a sieve with cold water) and 1¼ cups water. Simmer covered 12–15 minutes, turn off heat with lid still on, and rest 10 minutes, then fluff and cool. To speed cooling, dump the quinoa onto a sheet tray and spread it out.
    Cooking lentils: For 2 cups cooked lentils, start with about ¾ cup dried French green lentils. Cook according to package directions until tender but still firm, then drain and cool.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cupCalories: 221kcalCarbohydrates: 32gProtein: 11gFat: 7gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gCholesterol: 7mgSodium: 120mgPotassium: 535mgFiber: 9gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 3120IUVitamin C: 6mgCalcium: 85mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Easy Instant Pot Chicken Rice Soup​ Recipe

    11/10/2012 by Sally Cameron 13 Comments

    A bowl of chicken rice soup with herbs in a white bowl.

    Packed with tender chicken, wholesome vegetables, and hearty rice, Instant Pot chicken rice soup is a terrific comfort food meal, ready in about 30 minutes. The magic of pressure cooking makes it perfect for chilly days and busy weeknights when you crave something warm and flavorful-fast. Once you try this nourishing homemade classic, you'll never reach for boxed or canned soup again. No Instant Pot? No problem! I've included easy stovetop directions so everyone can enjoy this delicious soup.

    This hearty chicken rice soup tastes like it simmered all day. Pair it with a crisp green salad and perhaps a gooey grilled cheese sandwich for a satisfying meal.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • With a pressure cooker, it's fast and easy.
    • It's warming, healthy, and nourishing.
    • Leftovers freeze well (if there are any!).

    A carrot cake muffin would be nice on the side, or maybe a piece of homemade cornbread.

    Recipe Ingredients

    Ingredients for chicken rice soup prepped in bowls.
    • Oil: Extra virgin olive oil or avocado oil.
    • Vegetables: Carrots, onion, and celery, the classic trio for making soup and many other recipes.
    • Garlic: For flavor and garlic is good for you. Use fresh cloves or the paste in a tube for speed.
    • Rice: Use either uncooked long grain white rice (I use jasmine rice) or long grain brown rice. Long grain rice is the best because it cooks up light and fluffy. Note - I have not yet tested wild rice or other types of rice. When I do I will add notes.
    • Broth: homemade flavorful chicken broth is best but a good frozen or boxed brand will do. Be sure to read the label for any unhealthy ingredients.
    • Chicken: Raw chicken, either bone-in chicken breast or bone-in chicken thighs. The bone adds flavor.
    • Herbs: Bay leaf and fresh thyme.
    • Optional garnishes: chopped dill, lemon wedges, fresh parsley.

    See the recipe card for measurements.

    Chef's tip: Double batch. Depending on the size of your pressure cooker, you can make a double batch. It will take a little longer. Just don't fill the pot about the maximum fill line and you'll be fine. Enjoy half and freeze half or feed a larger group.

    instant pot chicken broth

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Use turkey broth and a bone-in turkey thigh (1 pound).
    • Use dried herbs if fresh are not available. Dried thyme or a dried blend like Italian blend work fine. Use ⅓ - ½ the amount of fresh herbs.
    • Want a creamy chicken rice soup? When it's done, add a little heavy cream or full fat canned coconut milk to the pot.
    • Boneless skinless chicken breast will work too.

    Instant Pot Recipe Instructions

    Oil in the bottom of an Instant Pot heating.
    Step 1: Choose the sauté mode on the Instant Pot and set the cook time for 5 minutes.
    Carrot, onion, and celery in a pressure cooker for making soup.
    Step 2: When hot, add the olive oil, then the carrot, onion, and celery. At the end of the saute cycle, add the garlic and stir for 30 seconds.
    Ingredients ready to go for chicken soup in an Instant Pot.
    Step 3: Remove the skin and fat from the chicken breast and cut it in half crosswise, add to pot with uncooked rice, herbs, salt, pepper.
    Adding golden chicken broth to a pot for soup.
    Step 4: Pour in the broth, lock lid on, close top valve. Set to normal high pressure for 10 minutes.

    When the soup is done and the Instant Pot beeps, press the cancel button and allow 15 minutes of natural pressure release, then quick release any remaining pressure by turning the steam release valve to the left (open). Remove the lid away from your face, being careful of the hot steam.

    Shredding chicken breast with forks in a glass pie plate.
    Step 5: Remove the chicken, shred the meat with two forks and discard the bones. Add the shredded chicken back into the soup. Soup is ready to serve.

    Stovetop Instructions

    To make this on a stove top the directions are almost the same, it just takes longer.

    • Saute your veggies in a heavy pot like a dutch oven over medium heat until soft, 5-7 minutes.
    • Add the broth, rice, herbs and chicken, bring to a almost a boil, cover with a lid, turn heat down to a low and cook until rice is tender and chicken is done. Chicken is done when it reaches 165°F. Follow the same instructions above to finish your chicken rice soup.
    • For a really quick soup, skip the raw chicken, add white rice and simmer until, then add shredded rotisserie chicken or leftover chicken and heat through until hot.
    • One more shortcut, use frozen cooked rice for a really speedy homemade chicken rice soup.

    For another delicious soup with rice, try this turkey and wild rice soup. Make it with leftover turkey or chicken.

    Serving Suggestions

    Ladle into soup bowls and enjoy a homemade chicken rice soup that will become a permanent recipe in your soups file.

    Garnish with fresh chopped parsley, fresh dill, and a squeeze of lemon juice or lime juice to add brightness. A simple side salad and maybe a gooey grilled cheese sandwich would be great together.

    Instant Pot chicken rice soup freezes well in an airtight container and last 3 months in the freezer. Here's a handy chart on how long food safely stores and freezes.

    A bowl of chicken rice soup with herbs in a white bowl.

    Recipe FAQs

    Should I cook the chicken before adding it to the soup

    If the soup is already finished, then yes, the chicken should be cooked and shredded before adding to the soup. If you are cooking the chicken as part of the soup it goes in raw. Be sure to remove the skin and any extra fat so the soup is not greasy. For chicken breast, cut the piece in half crosswise so it cooks quickly. as thighs are smaller, they can go in whole.

    Can I make chicken rice soup ahead of time

    Chicken rice soup can be made ahead of time and refrigerated for up to 4 days in an airtight container or frozen for up to 3 months. Remember to label and date your containers.

    What vegetables can I add to chicken rice soup

    Onion, carrot, and celery are the standard base for soups(called mirepoix). For more vegetables try adding green peas, chopped green beans, even a little finely chopped fennel.

    More Easy Instant Pot Recipes for Soup

    Keep that Instant Pot or pressure cooker out and let's make some more soup! All of these are easy to make and freeze well for future meals. Perfect for cooler weather, try these soup recipes: navy bean with ham, creamy curry cauliflower soup, or lentil and vegetable soup.

    • The deep colors of beef barley soup in a white bowl with herbs.
      Beef Barley Soup Recipe (Gluten-Free Option)
    • Instant pot lentil soup
      Instant Pot Lentil Soup Recipe
    • Navy bean soup with ham and vegetables.
      Instant Pot Navy Bean Soup Recipe (with ham)
    • Instant pot chicken broth
      Easy Instant Pot Chicken Broth

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make Instant Pot chicken rice soup, please comment, and let me know, I enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    chicken rice soup | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Easy Instant Pot Chicken Rice Soup

    Sally Cameron
    Homemade chicken rice soup, full of flavor and nutrition in about 30 minutes. This recipe uses a pressure cooker, a busy cook's best friend. If you don't have one, I highly recommend you invest in one.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 11 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Pressure time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 36 minutes mins
    Course Soup
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 yield 2 quarts
    Calories 270 kcal

    Equipment

    • 6 quart Instant Pot or electric pressure cooker or stove top pressure cooker

    Ingredients
      

    Chicken Soup

    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 2 medium carrots peeled and chopped small
    • 1 small onion chopped small
    • 2 large ribs celery chopped small
    • 2 garlic cloves chopped fine
    • ⅓ cup uncooked white rice long grain, Jasmine
    • 6 cups chicken broth preferably homemade
    • 1 pound bone-in chicken breast skin removed, cut in half.
    • 3 fresh thyme springs or ½ teaspoon dried
    • 1 bay leaf
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt or more to taste
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Optional Garnishes

    • chopped fresh parsley or dill
    • Lemon wedges optional

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Turn the Instant Pot on to the saute function. Set the timer for 5 minutes. When it's hot, add the oil, then the carrots, onions and celery. Saute, stirring occasionally so it does not stick on the bottom. At the end of the saute cycle, add the garlic and stir.
    • Add the rice, broth, chicken breast, thyme, bay leaf and salt to the pot. Lock lid on and bring to high pressure. Set timer for 10 minutes.
    • When the timer beeps, hit cancel and allow pot to do a natural release cycle for 15 minutes. Next, quick release the rest of the pressure by turning the valve to open (left). When all pressure is gone and the pressure guage drops, unlock the lid tilting away from you (careful of the hot steam) and remove the chicken breast.
      Shred the chicken with two forks on a plate or cutting board and add back to the pot. Discard the bones. Taste and adjust salt and pepper. Serve in warmed bowls and garnish with parsley or dill and lemon wedges if desired.

    Notes

    Stovetop Instructions

    To make this on a stove top the directions are almost the same, it just takes a little longer.
    • Saute your veggies in a heavy pot like a dutch oven over medium heat until soft, 5-7 minutes.
    • Add the broth, rice, herbs and chicken, bring to a almost a boil, cover with a lid, turn heat down to a low and cook until rice is tender and chicken is done. Chicken is done when it reaches 165°F. Follow the same instructions above to finish your chicken rice soup.
    • For a really quick soup, skip the raw chicken, add white rice and simmer until, then add shredded rotisserie chicken or leftover chicken and heat through until hot.
    • One more shortcut, use frozen cooked rice for a really speedy homemade chicken rice soup.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 270kcalCarbohydrates: 22gProtein: 28gFat: 8gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 58mgSodium: 527mgPotassium: 799mgFiber: 2gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 5170IUVitamin C: 6mgCalcium: 45mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Hot Honey Recipe

    06/16/2026 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    A jar of hot honey with red chile pepper and chile flakes, and honey dipper.

    This hot honey recipe is a simple homemade condiment that adds sweet and heat to almost anything. Made with honey, red pepper flakes, a splash of vinegar, and optional fresh or dried chiles, it's easy to customize from mildly warm to pleasantly spicy. Drizzle it over chicken, pizza, roasted vegetables, cornbread, cheese, and even desserts for a boost of flavor.

    Hot honey has moved from trendy pizza topping to pantry staple, and once you make it yourself, you'll see why. The technique is simple, but the flavor is all in the choices: mild or bold honey, fresh or dried chiles, gentle heat or a spicier kick. Make one batch and you'll start thinking of all the ways to make the next one your own.

    Hot Honey Recipe Snapshot

    • Sweet and spicy - A simple balance of honey, chile heat, and a splash of vinegar.
    • Easy to customize - Make it mild, medium, or spicy.
    • Ready in minutes - Warm gently, steep, strain if desired, and jar.
    • Use it everywhere - Drizzle over air fryer chicken, pizza, roasted vegetables, gluten-free cornbread, cheese boards, fruit, or even ice cream.
    • Make it sugar-free - Using zero-sugar honey substitute.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Honey - For homemade hot honey, use a good-quality honey you enjoy. Its flavor comes through, so choose one with a profile you like, from mild and floral to bold and robust. Notes below.
    • Red pepper flakes - The easiest heat source. Start modestly; they bloom fast.
    • Chile (optional) - Fresh or dried chiles add flavor, color, and varying levels of heat. Fresno, jalapeño, red Holland chile, chile de árbol, and Calabrian chiles are all good choices.
    • Apple cider vinegar - Just a splash balances the sweetness and makes it pop.
    • Pinch of salt - Small but important. It sharpens the whole thing.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Choosing Honey for Hot Honey

    The type of honey dramatically influences the final flavor, just as the type of olive oil affects a vinaigrette. I use a local raw honey I buy at my farmers market. If possible, buy honey from a local beekeeper or farmers market and experiment with different varietals to find your favorite flavor profile.

    Buckwheat Honey - Rich, robust, and earthy with molasses-like notes. If you enjoy bold flavors, this is an excellent choice for hot honey because the honey flavor remains noticeable even after the chiles are infused. The beekeeper I buy honey from says this is her favorite for making hot honey.

    Orange Blossom Honey - Floral and lightly citrusy. A wonderful all-purpose choice that creates a balanced hot honey with a bright finish.

    Eucalyptus Honey - Distinctive and aromatic with herbal notes. It makes a more complex hot honey that pairs especially well with cheese, grilled meats, and roasted vegetables. One of my favorites.

    Wildflower Honey - Variable from region to region but usually offers a nice middle ground between mild and robust.

    Clover Honey - Mild and approachable. A good choice if you're making hot honey for the first time or prefer the chile flavor to be the star.

    Variations

    • Citrus hot honey - Add a strip of orange or lemon zest while the honey steeps, then remove before storing.
    • Herbed Hot Honey - Add a small sprig of fresh thyme or rosemary while the honey steeps. Remove before storing.
    • Smoky Hot Honey - Add a pinch of smoked paprika or use a small piece of dried ancho chile for smoky depth.
    A gleaming jar of hot honey with red chile on the top and a honey drizzler.

    Chef's Tip: Build the Heat. When I first made hot honey, I was cautious about making it too spicy. The flavor was delicious, especially with orange peel and a pinch of smoked paprika, but it needed more kick. Red pepper flakes provide most of the heat, while fresh chiles add color, flavor, and varying heat depending on the variety. If you're heat-sensitive, start modestly, then taste and adjust. For more spice, add extra red pepper flakes, infuse longer, or leave some of the flakes and fresh chile slices in the jar instead of straining.

    How to Make Hot Honey

    Pouring honey into a small stainless steel pan to make hot honey.
    1. Add the honey to a small saucepan (2 quarts). Over low heat warm the honey for 5 minutes.
    Honey infusing in a pan with red chiles, red chile flakes, and orange peel.
    1. Add chile flakes, chile, citrus rind, dried chile. Infuse 15-20 minutes for mild heat, or 30 minutes for more flavor and spice. Taste before straining. For extra heat, add more red pepper flakes, use a hotter chile, infuse longer, or leave some flakes in the jar.
    Straining infused hot honey through a fine sieve into a jar.
    1. Strain into a clean jar. Stir in vinegar and salt.
    A jar of hot honey with red chile pepper and chile flakes, and honey dipper.
    1. Hot honey is ready to use.

    Serving Suggestions

    Hot honey is incredibly versatile. Use it as a finishing drizzle for savory dishes, stir it into dressings and sauces, or pair it with simple sweet recipes when you want a little heat. It's especially good with chicken, pizza, pan roasted vegetables, cheese, whipped ricotta, fruit dip, yogurt, and ice cream.

    How to Store Hot Honey

    Store hot honey in a clean glass jar with a tight-fitting lid at room temperature for up to 3 months. Keep it in a cool, dark pantry or cupboard, away from heat and direct sunlight.

    If you used fresh chiles, strain them out before storing for best quality and food safety. The honey may thicken or crystallize over time; gently warm the jar in a bowl of warm water and stir until smooth.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make hot honey more or less spicy?

    Yes. Adjust the amount of chili peppers or red pepper flakes to your taste. For a milder hot honey, use fewer peppers or steep them for less time. For more heat, add more peppers or let the honey infuse longer.

    Does hot honey need to be refrigerated?

    No. Store hot honey in a tightly sealed jar at room temperature in a cool, dark place. Refrigeration is not necessary and can cause the honey to crystallize.

    How long does homemade hot honey last?

    Homemade hot honey keeps for several months when stored in a clean, airtight jar at room temperature. Because honey is naturally shelf stable, it has an excellent storage life.

    Can I use dried chili flakes instead of fresh peppers?

    Yes. Both fresh peppers and dried red pepper flakes work well. Fresh peppers provide a cleaner, brighter flavor, while dried flakes create a more consistent heat.

    Recipes to Use With Hot Honey

    Here are a few delicious ways to use it, and you can drizzle hot honey over pizza, fried chicken, grilled meats, roasted vegetables, biscuits, cornbread, avocado toast, cheese boards, or even vanilla ice cream.

    • A single piece of gluten-free cornbread on a white plate with silver fork with pieces stacked behind.
      Gluten Free Cornbread (no flour)
    • Rund bowl of golden green Brussels sprouts with pancetta, herbs, and shallots ready for serving.
      Brussels Sprouts With Pancetta (Stovetop)
    • platter of oven baked chicken wings piled high with a buffalo ranch dressing in a small bowl.
      Oven Baked Chicken Wings
    • A bowl of whipped ricotta cheese dip with endive leaf in for scooping.
      Whipped Ricotta Cheese (Dip or Spread)

    If You Make Hot Honey

    Please leave a comment and let me know how hot you made it and how you used it. I love to hear from you and your comments help other readers. Thanks for supporting my site.

    📖 Recipe

    A jar of hot honey with red chile pepper and chile flakes, and honey dipper.

    Hot Honey Recipe

    Sally Cameron
    Sweet, spicy, and just tangy enough, this easy hot honey is a simple condiment that instantly wakes up pizza, chicken, roasted vegetables, cheese boards, biscuits, and more. Make it mild or fiery depending on how much chile heat you love.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Steep time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course condiment
    Cuisine American
    Servings 20 1 Tablespoon each
    Calories 69 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 pound honey of choice about 1 ⅓ cups
    • 1 -2 teaspoons red pepper flakes go easy they get hot
    • 1 small fresh chile thinly sliced, see notes below
    • 1-2 teaspoons apple cider vinegar
    • 1 pinch fine sea salt

    Options

    • 1 wide strip of orange zest
    • 1 pinch smoked paprika

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Heat the honey

    • Add the honey, red pepper flakes, and fresh chile, if using, to a small saucepan. Warm gently over low heat for 5 minutes, stirring occasionally. Do not boil.

    Infuse for flavor

    • Let the honey infuse 15-20 minutes for mild heat, or up to 30 minutes for more warmth. Taste before straining. For extra heat, add more red pepper flakes, use a hotter chile, infuse longer, or leave some flakes in the jar.
      Stir in the apple cider vinegar and salt. Strain for a smooth hot honey, or skip straining and leave the chile flakes in for more heat, intensity, and texture.

    How to store hot honey

    • Store hot honey in a clean glass jar with a tight-fitting lid at room temperature for up to 3 months. Keep it in a cool, dark pantry or cupboard, away from heat and direct sunlight.
      If you used fresh or dried chile, pull them out before storing for best quality and food safety. The honey may thicken or crystallize over time; gently warm the jar in a bowl of warm water and stir until smooth.

    Notes

    Chile notes - 
    Fresh chile is optional and adds color and fresh chile flavor. Fresno chiles are a nice choice for moderate heat and red color; Jalapeños work too, especially if Fresno chiles are unavailable. For milder hot honey, use just a few thin slices and remove the seeds and membranes. Serranos are hotter, so use sparingly. In the photo I used a red Holland pepper. 
    Dried chile is another option, adding extra flavor and color. Use 1 small dried chile such as chile de árbol for more heat, or a small torn piece of a larger dried chile such as guajillo or ancho. Shake the seeds out of dried chiles before adding
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 69kcalCarbohydrates: 19gProtein: 0.1gFat: 0.01gSaturated Fat: 0.001gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.004gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.002gSodium: 4mgPotassium: 14mgFiber: 0.1gSugar: 19gVitamin A: 18IUVitamin C: 0.2mgCalcium: 2mgIron: 0.1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Roasted Acorn Squash

    11/19/2017 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

    Maple roasted acorn squash slices on a gray platter with pomegranates seeds scattered on top.

    Roasted acorn squash is an easy fall side dish that's caramelized, naturally sweet, and perfect for weeknight dinners or your Thanksgiving table. These roasted acorn squash slices are brushed with a lightly spiced maple glaze, then finished with ruby pomegranate seeds and toasted pepitas for beautiful color, texture, and flavor. Best of all, they roast in about 25 minutes-much faster than many roasted acorn squash recipes.

    A gray platter or roast acorn squash with parsley garnish and pomegranate seeds.

    With golden-orange flesh and deep green ridges, acorn squash looks like a giant acorn-and it's one of fall's easiest vegetables to prepare. Roasting makes the slices tender, caramelized, and slightly sweet, while a quick maple and olive oil glaze deepens their earthy flavor and adds a glossy finish. In about 25 minutes, you'll have a beautiful side dish that feels festive enough for the holidays but simple enough for an everyday meal.

    Roasted Acorn Squash Recipe Snapshot

    • Naturally sweet and caramelized - A maple and olive oil glaze enhances the squash's earthy flavor as it roasts.
    • Beautiful presentation - Golden slices finished with pomegranate seeds and pepitas add festive color and texture.
    • Quick to roast - The sliced squash cooks in about 25 minutes, much faster than roasting acorn squash halves.
    • Perfect for fall and holidays - An easy side dish for weeknight dinners, Thanksgiving, or holiday entertaining.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Acorn squash - Choose small to medium squash. Smaller squash are easier to cut, roast more evenly, and tend to be slightly sweeter.
    • Maple syrup - Use pure maple syrup, not pancake syrup. For a lower-sugar variation, use a monk fruit or allulose maple syrup.
    • Warm spices - Nutmeg, ginger, and allspice complement the squash's natural sweetness without overpowering it.
    • Pomegranate arils - These jewel-bright seeds add fresh flavor and beautiful color. Buy ready-to-use arils or see my guide for how to cut a pomegranate without the mess.
    • Pumpkin seeds (pepitas) - Add crunch and contrast. Toast them lightly in a dry pan or the oven. See my How to Roast Pepitas post. They're so good you may want extra for snacking and salads.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

    Roasted butternut squash? Oh yes please, it's so good and easy!

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Chinese Five Spice - Swap the individual warm spices for Chinese five spice, a fragrant blend typically made with cinnamon, star anise, fennel, cloves, and Sichuan pepper or ginger. Start with a small amount, as the flavor is more concentrated than cinnamon alone.
    • Parmesan herb - For a savory roasted acorn squash, skip the maple syrup and brush the slices with olive oil. Sprinkle with Parmesan, garlic powder, thyme, salt, and pepper, then roast until tender and golden at the edges.

    Butternut apple soup is a simple, easy fall recipe, great for a warm lunch!

    How to Roast Acorn Squash

    Pre-heat oven to 425°F. Ready a half sheet baking tray with parchment paper.

    An acorn squash, split in half on a dark cutting borad, with a chefs knife.
    1. Slice a little off the top and bottom ends, stand on the flat end, then split acorn squash in half top to bottom.
    Halved acorn squash with seeds scopped out with a spoon.

    2. Scoop out the seeds with a spoon.

    Cutting acorn squash rings with round cookie cutters.

    3. Slice the squash crosswise into ¾-inch-thick pieces. Use a round cookie cutter to trim away the fibrous center for a clean edge, or use a paring knife.

    A tray of sliced acorn squash rings on a baking tray glazed with maple syrup.

    4. Lay acorn squash slices on a parchment lined baking tray and brush with olive oil and spices. Roast for 16-18 minutes, until tender when pierced with the tip of a paring knife.

    Maple roasted acorn squash slices on a gray platter with pomegranates seeds scattered on top.

    How to Cut Acorn Squash (Safely and Easily)

    If you've ever wondered how to cut acorn squash without struggling, the key is a sharp knife and a stable cutting surface.

    • Use a heavy, sharp chef's knife, about 8-10 inches long, for good control and leverage.
    • Trim a thin slice from the top and bottom so the squash stands flat and steady.
    • Stand it upright and cut straight down through the center.
    • Scoop out the seeds and stringy pulp with a sturdy spoon.
    • Lay the halves flat and slice crosswise into ¾-inch crescents so they roast evenly.
    • For especially hard squash, microwave it whole for 45-60 seconds first to soften the skin slightly and make cutting easier.

    If the squash is especially hard, microwave it whole for 45-60 seconds to soften the skin slightly before cutting - it makes the job much safer and easier.

    Chef's Tip: Is the Skin Edible? Yes, the skin of roasted acorn squash is edible. On smaller squash it becomes quite tender as it roasts. Whether you eat it is a matter of personal preference-I often leave it on for presentation and let everyone decide at the table. If you prefer, the roasted flesh easily scoops away from the skin with a fork.

    Serving Suggestions

    Arrange the roasted acorn squash slices on a platter and finish with pomegranate arils and toasted pumpkin seeds (pepitas) for color, crunch, and contrast.

    These maple-glazed squash slices pair beautifully with roast chicken breasts, smoked turkey breast, pork tenderloin, or beef tenderloin - making them an easy choice for fall dinners, Thanksgiving, and holiday entertaining. For a vegetarian meal, serve them alongside a hearty fall salad, quinoa, or another whole grain.

    Maple roasted acorn squash on a serving platter.

    Storage and Reheating

    Store leftover roasted acorn squash slices in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. To reheat, place them on a baking sheet and warm in a 375°F oven for 10-12 minutes, or in an air fryer for 3-4 minutes, until heated through and slightly crisp again. Avoid microwaving, as it softens the caramelized edges and changes the texture.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do I choose a ripe acorn squash at the store?

    Look for an acorn squash that feels heavy for its size with firm, dull skin. It should be mostly dark green with perhaps a small orange patch where it rested on the ground. Avoid squash with soft spots, cracks, mold, or skin that is mostly orange.

    Do I need to peel acorn squash before roasting it?

    Look for an acorn squash that feels heavy for its size with firm, dull skin. It should be mostly dark green with perhaps a small orange patch where it rested on the ground. Avoid squash with soft spots, cracks, mold, or skin that is mostly orange.

    What's the best way to cut and prepare acorn squash for roasting?

    Use a heavy, sharp chef's knife. Trim a thin slice from the top and bottom to create a stable base, stand the squash upright, and cut down through the center. Scoop out the seeds and stringy pulp, lay the halves flat, then slice crosswise into ¾-inch-thick pieces.

    More Fall Side Dish Recipe Ideas

    Looking for more colorful sides to pair with roasted meats or holiday mains? Try these easy fall vegetable recipes. Simple to make, naturally gluten-free, and full of seasonal flavor.

    • roasted carrots with thyme
      Maple Roasted Carrots (Easy Glazed Carrots Recipe)
    • Golden corn souffle in a glass baking dish on a gray plaid kitchen towel.
      Corn Souffle (From Scratch No Jiffy Mix)
    • lemon thyme brussels sprouts
      Sautéed Brussels Sprouts with Lemon and Thyme
    • Classic herbed bread stuffing in white casserole ready to serve.
      Gluten Free Thanksgiving Stuffing Recipe

    If You Roast Acorn Squash

    Please drop me a comment and let me know how you enjoyed it. I love hearing from you and your comments help other readers too.

    📖 Recipe

    maple roasted acorn squash | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Roasted Acorn Squash

    Sally Cameron
    A sweet, savory, spiced glaze is brushed over acorn squash slices before roasting, then garnished with pomegranate and pumpkin seeds to serve. Beautiful, healthy and tasty. 
    5 from 2 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 16 minutes mins
    Total Time 26 minutes mins
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 84 kcal

    Equipment

    • Baking sheet
    • Baking parchment paper or foil
    • Pastry brush for brushing on the glaze
    • Sharp chef's knife. 9" or 10"
    • large circular cookie cutter or cutting rings optional, but a handy kitchen addition.

    Ingredients
      

    • 2 1 ½ pound acorn squash
    • 1 tablespoon maple syrup or monk fruit maple syrup
    • 1 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil
    • ¼ teaspoons nutmeg
    • ¼ teaspoon allspice
    • ¼ teaspoon ginger
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt

    Optional garnishes

    • 2-3 tablespoons pomegranate seeds
    • 2-3 tablespoons toasted pumpkin seeds (pepitas)
    • 1 tablespoon fresh chopped parsley

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Set-up and make the glaze

    • Pre-heat oven to 425°F. Cover a baking sheet with parchment paper or foil. Make the glaze by combining the maple syrup, oil, spices, and salt.

    Slice acorn squash

    • Place a damp kitchen towel or board mat under a cutting board for stability. With a large, sharp, heavy knife, such as a 8"-10" chefs knife, lay the acorn squash on its side and slice a small piece off the top and bottom. Stand the squash flat on end and cut through the center, splitting it in half. With a spoon, scoop out the seeds and fiber and discard. 

    Trim the squash

    • Lay the squash halves flat and cut the halves into ¾" slices. To clean up the inner edges, use a paring knife or circular cookie cutters.

    Roast the squash

    • Lay slices flat on prepared baking sheet. Brush with the glaze, then sprinkle with sea salt. Roast in the oven for 16-18 minutes or until the squash is tender when pierced with the tip of a sharp knife.
      Plate slices on a platter and sprinkle with pomegranate seeds and pepitas to serve. 

    Notes

    Spice options:
    For another option, try Five Spice (also called Chinese five spice). It's a terrific warm spice blend. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 84kcalCarbohydrates: 6gProtein: 2gFat: 6gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 4gTrans Fat: 1gSodium: 147mgPotassium: 93mgFiber: 1gSugar: 4gVitamin A: 7IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 18mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    How to Make Homemade Almond Milk

    01/01/2012 by Sally Cameron 39 Comments

    A glass dairy bottle of homemade almond milk with raw almonds on a wooden table.

    Skip the store-bought brands and make your own homemade almond milk. Free from unwanted additives, this clean, wholesome, and nutritious plant-based milk is perfect for all your non-dairy needs. We love using it daily in protein smoothies for a healthy start to the day or a post-workout refuel. It's so simple-soak the almonds, blend in a high-speed blender, and enjoy. Homemade really is better.

    Glass dairy bottle of creamy homemade almond milk with a glass of milk on the side.

    I started making homemade almond milk when I read the ingredients labels of many store brands. It's so simple to make, so why not make your own? I stock raw almonds in my pantry, buying them in bulk, and we always have almond milk for our morning smoothies. Homemade beats the stuff in a box or carton, which can be processed with additives you don't want.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Homemade almond milk is super easy to make.
    • Never run out of almond milk.
    • Stock raw almonds in the pantry.
    • Buy almonds in bulk to save.
    • Strain or not, I usually don't.
    • Flavor and sweetening options.

    For creative ideas on making healthy protein smoothies, read my Ultimate Guide to Making Healthy Smoothies.

    Recipe Ingredients

    • Almonds: Be sure you buy plain raw almonds, not roasted, salted, or flavored. Buy in bulk at warehouse stores to save money.
    • Water: Pure, clean, filtered water is best, not tap water unless you have very good water (not where I live).

    If you've heard the critics that growing almonds wastes water, read this article on growing almonds first. It will help you understand the true facts about almonds.

    Chef's tip: With all alternative milks, buy unsweetened and unflavored and add what you want for quality and control.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Vanilla: If you love vanilla almond milk, add a little vanilla extract or ground vanilla bean to the almond milk. Optional.
    • Sweetened almond milk: If you want sweetened almond milk, use a natural sweetener such as brown rice syrup, liquid stevia, maple or honey, or a zero-sugar sweetener such as a monk fruit/allulose blend or a monk fruit simple syrup. Another good option is zero-sugar maple syrup or honey. Some people like to add soft pitted dates but they don't blend really easily due to their chewy texture.
    • Flavored almond milk: Try cocoa powder, add a little cinnamon, pumpkin spice blend, or Japanese matcha powder for variety. Adding maca powder gives it a sort of butterscotch-earthy flavor and studies say maca may have health benefits.

    Chef's tip on flavored almond milk: While you can flavor almond milk many ways, my recommendation is to leave it plain and simple, and add the flavor to whatever you are making, such as a protein smoothie. It's easier to flavor and get the right flavor level and concentration.

    Recipe Instructions

    Raw soaked almonds in a blender ready to make almond milk on a dark walnut cutting board.

    Step 1: Soak almonds overnight or for 8 hours in cold filtered water.

    Step 2: Drain off soaking water, add fresh filtered water to the blender container, pur on high speed for about 1 minute. Allow the foamy top to subside or scoop it off for more accurate almond milk measuring. It's ready to use right away, strained or not.

    To Strain or Not

    Some recipes strain the almond milk through a nut milk bag for a smoother texture. I do not. Why toss all of those healthy little bits of almonds? Do what suits you best. We like the texture of un-strained almond milk. It's thick and rich. It will keep for 3-4 days in the refrigerator. Stir or whisk before using. If you let it sit too long and it smells sour, toss it.

    The only time I strain my homemade almond milk is if I need a thin, fluid milk for using in a recipe.

    Almond to Water Ratios

    Depending on the capacity of your blender and your volume needs, try these ratios. The water listed is not the soaking water, but the final water used to make the milk.

    • 9 ounces almonds to 6 cups water.
    • 7 ½ ounces almonds to 5 cups water.
    • 6 ounces almonds to 4 cups water (1 quart).
    • 4 ½ ounces water to 3 cups water.

    For more plant-based milk options try my pumpkin seed milk, cashew milk, or quick homemade coconut milk.

    Why Almonds?

    Almonds are considered the most nutritious of nuts. From a nutrition standpoint, almonds are a rich source of protein containing fiber, omega-3 and 6 fatty acids, vitamin E, magnesium, calcium, and zinc. That, and they taste great.

    Why Soak?

    Almonds contain enzyme inhibitors that can interfere with digestion and nutrient absorption, so toss the soaking water and use fresh filtered water to puree your almonds into milk in a high-speed blender. Soaked almonds also puree into a smoother milk.

    Bottle of homemade almond milk and glass of it with almonds scattered on a wooden tabletop.

    Tips For Buying Raw Almonds

    While a 2007 USDA law requires all almonds grown in the United States or Mexico to be sanitized or pasteurized, there are two methods used: steam pasteurization and Propylene gas (PPO). You want steam pasteurized.

    Steam pasteurization is non-toxic and does not kill the nut. It's done with a short burst of steam that sanitizes the surface of the nut only. Steam pasteurized almonds will sprout, so they are still alive. Look for the words steam pasteurized somewhere on the package. If nothing is listed, call the producer and ask.

    The other method using Propylene Oxide (PPO) gas is industry standard because it is cheaper. PPO gas is classified by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) as a probable human carcinogen. Not too appetizing or healthy for your family. Here are the almonds I buy off Amazon or at Costco. Plus I buy only organic.

    Serving Suggestions

    We use homemade almond milk daily in our protein smoothies for breakfast and for post-workout smoothies. Use it almost anywhere that calls for milk. Enjoy a cold glass with a cookie, use it in breakfast recipes such as overnight oats with chia seeds or Bircher muesli.

    Recipe FAQs

    Do I need to soak the almonds for almond milk?

    Yes, soaking softens the almonds for easier blending and smoother milk. It also helps remove phytic acid for better digestion and nutrient absorption.

    How much water should I use?

    It depends on how creamy of an almond milk you want. For a quart of almond milk, soak 6 ounces of raw almonds to 4 cups water (1 quart).

    Can I freeze almond milk?

    You can freeze almond milk in ice cube trays or portioned silicone trays. I find that the texture changes a bit different, so prefer making it fresh since it's so easy, but if freezing is a necessity, then freeze it.

    What can I do with the leftover almond pulp?

    Skip the straining process and use your almond milk as is. This is what we do, Why toss the nutrition in the almonds? If you want to strain or need to for a specific recipe and have pulp, it can be used in energy balls or stirred into porridge. It's also great for composting.

    More Homemade Plant Milk Recipes

    If you love almond milk, try these other easy nut and seed milks as alternatives. They are delicious and different in their own right. For delicious and healthy smoothies, check out the protein smoothie recipe page.

    • White round platter with a glass of hemp seed milk, a pitcher, and hemp seeds.
      Hemp Mylk (hemp milk recipe)
    • Homemade Coconut Milk (from Canned in 1 Minute)
    • pale green pumpkin seed milk
      Homemade Pumpkin Seed Milk (Dairy-free)
    • homemade cashew milk pouring into a glass on a wooden counter.
      Cashew Milk Recipe

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make homemade almond milk, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    A glass dairy bottle of homemade almond milk with raw almonds on a wooden table.

    Homemade Almond Milk

    Sally Cameron
    Homemade almond milk is a great plant-based alternative to cow's milk. The recipe halves easily for individuals. This recipes takes 12-24 hours of soaking time and just a minute to make. If you like thick creamy almond milk, use it as is. If you like it thinner, strain through a nut milk bag. They are available at many health food stores and online. See my note at the end on sweetening or flavoring your milk.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Soaking time 8 hours hrs
    Total Time 8 hours hrs 5 minutes mins
    Course Beverage
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4 Yield 1 quart
    Calories 122 kcal

    Equipment

    • High speed blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 6 ounces raw almonds
    • Filtered water to cover the almonds for soaking
    • 4 cups fresh filtered water for pureeing

    Options

    • A splash of vanilla or almond extract optional for flavoring

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Place almonds in container and cover with water. Cover and refrigerate for 8-24 hours. Strain off soaking water. Pour soaked almonds and fresh filtered water into a high-speed blender with a tight fitting lid and process for 60 seconds on high. Start slow and build up the speed. Refrigerate and use within 3-4 days. Stir each time you use as it settles.

    Notes

    Depending on the capacity of your blender and your volume needs, try these ratios. The water listed is not the soaking water, but the final water used to make the milk.
    • 9 ounces almonds to 6 cups water.
    • 7 ½ ounces almonds to 5 cups water.
    • 6 ounces almonds to 4 cups water (1 quart).
    • 4 ½ ounces water to 3 cups water.
    •  
    •  
    •  
    Flavoring options: Cacao powder, match powder, vanilla extract, almond extract.
    Sweetening options: brown rice syrup, liquid stevia, maple or honey, or a zero-sugar sweetener such as a monk fruit/allulose blend or a monk fruit simple syrup, or soft pitted dates.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 8ouncesCalories: 122kcalCarbohydrates: 5gProtein: 5gFat: 11gSaturated Fat: 1gSodium: 8mgPotassium: 150mgFiber: 3gSugar: 1gCalcium: 61mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Baked Pistachio Crusted Salmon

    03/19/2026 by Sally Cameron 8 Comments

    A pistachio crusted salmon filet on a bed of bright green sugar snap peas with a fork.

    This pistachio crusted salmon is an easy, elegant dinner that feels a little special without much effort. Tender salmon fillets are topped with a crunchy mix of pistachios, breadcrumbs, fresh parsley, Dijon mustard, and a touch of honey, then baked until golden and crisp. This pistachio salmon recipe is simple enough for a weeknight but elegant enough for company, and it always gets compliments.

    Pistachio crusted salmon filets with a snap pea salad on white plates.

    With good salmon available year-round, this pistachio crusted salmon is an easy, elegant way to serve it. The crunchy pistachio topping is a delicious contrast to the tender fish, and the recipe comes together quickly - easy enough for a weeknight, but special enough for guests. Once the salmon is prepped, the topping mixed, and the oven hot, it bakes in about 12 minutes, so you can have dinner on the table in about 30 minutes.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Pistachio Crusted Salmon Recipe Snapshot

    • Quick and easy - Ready in under 30 minutes with simple ingredients.
    • Crunchy and flavorful - A savory-sweet crust of pistachios, Dijon mustard, honey, and breadcrumbs or panko, with a gluten-free option.
    • Elegant but simple - Special enough for guests, easy enough for weeknights.

    Love pistachios? Try this pistachio crusted pork rib roast.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for pistachio crusted salmon on a kitchen counter.
    • Salmon fillets - Wild-caught is ideal, but good-quality farmed salmon works too, whether fresh or frozen and fully thawed.
    • Dijon mustard - Adds tang and depth to balance the slightly sweet crust.
    • Honey - A mild honey works best, or use a zero-sugar honey alternative.
    • Pistachios - Use unsalted shelled pistachios. If using dry-roasted pistachios, you can use them as-is. Raw or lightly roasted pistachios give the prettiest color.
    • Breadcrumbs - Use unseasoned panko or breadcrumbs, regular or gluten-free, for a crunchy texture.
    • Fresh parsley - Brightens the crust with fresh flavor and color.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, pepper, and granulated garlic powder.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • No pistachios - Try chopped walnuts, almonds, pecans, or hazelnuts instead.
    • No Dijon - Use whole grain mustard, or substitute yellow mustard with a little lemon juice.
    • Add citrus - Mix a little lemon zest into the topping for extra flavor lift.
    • Mild onion flavor - Add chopped chives to the topping mixture.

    For a terrific appetizer with either pistachios or walnuts, try these goat cheese crostini with baked nectarines.

    How to Make Pistachio Crusted Salmon

    Preheat the oven to 375°F. If preferred, remove the skin from the salmon with a very sharp, thin knife, such as a filet knife. Trim away any dark purple areas if desired; this is the bloodline, which can have a stronger flavor. If that doesn't bother you, you can leave it as-is and bake the salmon skin-on. Place the salmon fillets on a parchment-lined baking sheet.

    Salmon with honey-mustard topping and a breadcrumb and herb crust mix.
    1. Season salmon with salt, pepper, and granulated garlic. Mix the honey and mustard together, and the breadcrumbs, parsley, and chopped pistachios.
    Salmon fillets topped with honey mustard sauce on a sheet pan with parchment.
    1. Evenly spread the honey mustard over the filet tops and sides.
    Pieces of salmon with a pistachio crust patted on top.
    1. Pat the pistachio crust mix over the top and pat down gently. Bake in a 375F oven for 10-12 minutes or until the salmon reaches 140°F - 145°F internally. It's ready to serve.
    A filet of pistachio-crusted salmon with sugar snap peas and lemon edges in the back, on a white plate.

    Serving Suggestions

    The photos feature my sugar snap pea salad, a great side for pistachio crusted salmon because the fresh crunch and bright color pair so well with the fish. You can also serve it with one of these delicious side dishes:

    • Riced mashed potatoes.
    • Simple roast asparagus or easy french green beans.
    • Honey roasted carrots.
    • Fennel orange salad with orange vinaigrette.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make this ahead of time?

    Yes. You can prepare the crust mixture and honey-mustard blend a few hours ahead and refrigerate it, and skin the salmon in advance if desired. For the best texture, assemble and bake the salmon just before serving.

    What if I don't have pistachios?

    You can use other nuts such as almonds, walnuts, or pecans. Each adds a slightly different flavor, but they all make a delicious crunchy topping.

    Can I use skin-on salmon?

    Yes. The crust goes on the top side, so the salmon can be baked with the skin on. If preferred, the skin can be removed after baking.

    How do I know when the salmon is done?

    The salmon should register 140-145°F in the thickest part with a digital thermometer and flake easily with a fork. If you prefer salmon a little more moist, pull it closer to 140°F and let carryover heat finish the job. If you like it more fully cooked, go closer to 145°F.

    More Salmon Recipes

    Salmon is versatile and easy to cook! Try some of these recipes when you want to enjoy salmon (or my reader favorite smoked salmon dip).

    • Close up of a platter of salmon filets with lemon and herbs on a table.
      How to Make Steamed Salmon
    • Creamy salmon dip on an appetizer tray with crackers and cucumber chips.
      The Best Smoked Salmon Dip Recipe
    • black and white sesame salmon
      Sesame Crusted Salmon
    • Flaked smoked salmon from a pellet grill on a serving board with lemons.
      Smoked Salmon on a Pellet Grill

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make pistachio crusted salmon, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    Originally published 7-11-2011, now updated.

    📖 Recipe

    A pistachio crusted salmon filet on a bed of bright green sugar snap peas with a fork.

    Baked Pistachio Crusted Salmon

    Sally Cameron
    The crunchy pistachio and herb crust works well with the richness of salmon. Out of the oven, finish your salmon with a squeeze of fresh lemon juice. Serve with asparagus or sugar snap peas.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Cook Time 12 minutes mins
    Total Time 22 minutes mins
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 371 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    Salmon

    • 4 6-ounce salmon fillets
    • 2 tablespoons Dijon mustard
    • 1 tablespoon honey or maple syrup
    • ½ cup finely chopped unsalted shelled raw pistachios or dry roasted
    • ¼ cup Panko crumbs or dry breadcrumbs gluten-free or regular
    • 2 tablespoons finely chopped fresh Italian parsley
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ¼ teaspoon granulated garlic powder optional

    Garnish

    • 4 lemon wedges

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Prep the salmon and preheat the oven

    • Preheat the oven to 375°F. You can bake the salmon either skin-on or skinned, whichever you prefer. If skinning, trim away the dark purple area on the underside, called the bloodline, as it can taste strong. For how to skin salmon, see my post with step-by-step photos.
      Place the fillets on a foil-lined or parchment-lined rimmed baking sheet. Pat dry with paper towels and season lightly with salt, pepper, and garlic.

    Make the topping

    • In a small bowl, mix the Dijon mustard and honey into a smooth paste. In another small bowl, combine the pistachios, breadcrumbs, and parsley.
    • Spread the honey-mustard mixture over the tops of the salmon fillets, then press the pistachio mixture onto the tops, patting lightly so it adheres. If you have extra topping, it can be refrigerated for a few days. Sprinkle it over veggies.

    Bake the salmon

    • Roast for 10-12 minutes, depending on the thickness of the fillets and how cold the salmon is going into the oven. Bake until the salmon reaches 140°F - 145°F in the thickest part. Serve with lemon wedges for squeezing over the top.

    Notes

    • No pistachios - Try chopped walnuts, almonds, pecans, or hazelnuts instead.
    • No Dijon - Use whole grain mustard, or substitute yellow mustard with a little lemon juice.
    • Add citrus - Mix a little lemon zest into the topping for extra flavor lift.
    • Mild onion flavor - Add chopped chives to the topping mixture.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 371kcalCarbohydrates: 14gProtein: 38gFat: 18gSaturated Fat: 3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 7gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gCholesterol: 94mgSodium: 333mgPotassium: 1048mgFiber: 3gSugar: 6gVitamin A: 286IUVitamin C: 13mgCalcium: 57mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Healthy Egg Salad

    06/23/2026 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    Open faced egg salad sandwiches topped with capers and herbs on a marble server.

    Healthy egg salad is creamy, satisfying, and packed with protein, made with hard-boiled eggs, a little mayonnaise, Greek yogurt, Dijon mustard, celery, and shallot. This homemade egg salad is lighter than classic deli-style egg salad but still rich, flavorful, and perfect for sandwiches, lettuce cups, wraps, or easy high-protein lunches.

    Egg salad open faced sandwiches garnished with chopped herbs and capers.

    This easy egg salad recipe is one of our fast, go-to high protein lunches, especially when I've hard-boiled the eggs ahead of time. The balance of creamy Greek yogurt and just enough mayonnaise keeps it fresh and satisfying, while Dijon mustard, crunchy celery, and finely chopped shallot add plenty of flavor.

    Healthy Egg Salad Recipe Snapshot

    • Lighter but still creamy - Yogurt plus a little mayo keeps it creamy, not heavy.
    • Protein-packed - Hard-boiled eggs make it satisfying for lunch or meal prep.
    • Fresh crunch - Celery and shallot add texture and flavor.
    • Quick with prepped eggs - Make it fast when hard-boiled eggs are ready. It's one of the easiest make-ahead lunches for meal prep.
    • Easy to serve - Great in sandwiches, lettuce cups, wraps, or over greens.

    If you have extra hard boiled eggs, make deviled eggs!

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Healthy egg salad ingredients in prep bowls on a counter.
    • Eggs - Use large hard-boiled eggs, peeled and chopped for a protein-rich salad.
    • Mayonnaise - Just a little adds classic egg salad flavor and creamy richness without making it heavy.
    • Yogurt - Use Greek yogurt for tang, richness, and extra protein.
    • Shallot - Milder and sweeter than onion, shallot adds light savory flavor.
    • Celery - Adds fresh crunch and lightness.
    • Mustard - Creamy Dijon adds flavor and tang, while whole grain Dijon adds a little texture.
    • Herbs - Fresh dill, chives, and parsley are classic with egg salad. Use one, or a blend, for fresh flavor and color.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Dressing options - Use all mayonnaise or all Greek yogurt, if preferred.
    • Onion options - Swap the shallot for finely chopped white onion or green onion.
    • Mustard - Use all smooth Dijon mustard instead of a blend.
    • Tangy additions - Add chopped capers or pickles for a salty, briny bite. Capers are a good garnish too.

    Chef's Tip: How to Dice Eggs Neatly
    For evenly diced hard-boiled eggs, use an egg slicer. Slice the egg lengthwise first, then turn the slices crosswise and slice again. Transfer to a cutting board and give the eggs a quick chop for neat, even pieces. It's faster than chopping whole eggs with a knife and gives egg salad a better texture.

    How to Make Healthy Egg Salad

    A small white bowl of peeled hard boiled eggs.
    1. Hard-boil and chill the eggs. Use my hard-boiled eggs tutorial for the full method. Peel eggs. Use right way or refrigerate for making egg salad later.
    Slicing hard boiled eggs with an egg slicer on a black cutting board.
    1. Slice and chop the eggs.
    Egg salad dressing ingredients in a glass bowl.
    1. Mix all of the dressing ingredients.
    Finished egg salad in a glass bowl ready for serving.
    1. Add the chopped hard boiled eggs and stir gently to coat. Ready to serve or chill for later.

    Add extra hard boiled eggs to a spinach salad for more protein too.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve healthy egg salad:

    • Scooped over crisp salad greens.
    • In lettuce cups for a lighter, low-carb option.
    • Make an egg salad sandwich on toasted gluten-free bread.
    • Stuff egg salad into halved avocados.
    • Serve with crackers or cucumber slices for more crunch.

    Storage

    Healthy egg salad keeps for up to 3-5 days in an container in the refrigerator. For best flavor and texture, enjoy it within the first 3 days. Stir before serving, as a little moisture may collect as it sits.

    Can I freeze egg salad? No, the mayonnaise and yogurt can separate after thawing, giving the salad a watery texture and affecting the flavor.

    More Healthy Salad Recipes

    • A serving bowl of chickpea tuna salad with a serving spoon, nearby lemon wedges, crackers, and greens.
      Chickpea Salad with Tuna
    • Creamy ham salad piled on red leaf lettuce greens with a fork on a white plate.
      Easy Ham Salad Recipe
    • A white bowl of lentil quinoa salad with basil leaves and a serving spoon.
      French Lentil Quinoa Salad
    • Chicken and avocado salad with a lime wedge in a white bowl with a spoon.
      Easy Chicken and Avocado Salad

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make egg salad ahead of time?

    Yes. Egg salad is a good make-ahead lunch and keeps well in the refrigerator for up to 3-5 days. For the best flavor and texture, enjoy it within the first 3 days.

    Can I freeze egg salad?

    No. Egg salad does not freeze well because the mayonnaise and Greek yogurt can separate after thawing, making the texture watery.

    Can I make egg salad without mayonnaise?

    Yes. Use all Greek yogurt for a mayo-free egg salad. It will be tangier and lighter, so taste and adjust with a little extra Dijon mustard, salt, or herbs.

    What can I serve with healthy egg salad?

    Serve healthy egg salad in sandwiches, lettuce cups, wraps, over greens, stuffed into avocado halves, or with crackers and cucumber slices.

    If You Make Egg Salad

    Please leave a comment and let me know how you served it. I love hearing from you and your comments help other readers too. Thanks for supporting my site.

    📖 Recipe

    Open faced egg salad sandwiches topped with capers and herbs on a marble server.

    Healthy Egg Salad

    Sally Cameron
    With cooked and peeled hard boiled eggs in the refrigerator, this healthy egg salad is made is just a few minutes for a terrific lunch option. Serve as an open faced sandwich on a slice of bread or in lettuce cups.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course lunch
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 241 kcal

    Equipment

    • egg slicer optional but makes it faster

    Ingredients
      

    • 8 large hard boiled eggs peeled
    • 3 tablespoons mayonnaise
    • 3 tablespoons greek yogurt
    • 2 tablespoons finely chopped shallots
    • 2 tablespoons finely chopped celery
    • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
    • 1 teaspoon whole grain Dijon mustard or use all creamy dijon
    • 2 teaspoons chopped dill, parsley or chives or a combination
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon white pepper or black pepper

    Optional garnished

    • extra chopped herbs
    • capers rinsed and dried
    • lemon zest

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Chop the hard boiled eggs. In a medium bowl, mix the mayo, yogurt, shallots, celery, mustards, herbs, salt and pepper. Gently fold in the chopped eggs.
      Season with salt and pepper, then taste and adjust with more of anything you prefer — more yogurt or mayo for more creaminess, a little more mustard for more flavor, or more herbs, salt, or pepper.

    Notes

    For neatly diced hard boiled eggs, use an egg slicer. Place the egg lengthwise in the slicer and slice. Remove the egg, separate the eggs into two halves, then place each half crosswise in the slicer, flat side up, and slice again. Transfer to a cutting board and give the eggs a quick chop for even pieces.
     
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 241kcalCarbohydrates: 3gProtein: 14gFat: 19gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 6gMonounsaturated Fat: 6gTrans Fat: 0.02gCholesterol: 378mgSodium: 544mgPotassium: 180mgFiber: 0.5gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 571IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 71mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Pan Seared Scallops Recipe with Miso Sauce

    02/09/2013 by Sally Cameron 5 Comments

    seared scallops with orange miso sauce

    Pan seared scallops are fast, elegant, and easy to make at home. This recipe pairs golden, tender sea scallops with a simple orange miso sauce made with sweet white miso, fresh ginger, and citrus for a savory-sweet finish. It's a restaurant-style seafood dinner that comes together quickly enough for a weeknight but feels special enough for company.

    Seared Scallops with Orange Miso Sauce.

    The key to great pan seared scallops is a hot pan, dry scallops, and a quick cook so they turn golden outside and stay tender inside. Serve them over rice, cauliflower rice (without the cheese), or a simple vegetable like blanched baby green beans, then spoon the orange miso sauce over the top. Make the sauce ahead if you'd like, and dinner comes together in minutes.

    Pan Seared Scallops Recipe Snapshot

    • Quick cooking - Scallops sear in minutes for an easy seafood dinner.
    • Restaurant-style flavor - The orange miso sauce adds savory, sweet, citrusy flavor with ginger and garlic.
    • Special but simple - Elegant enough for company, fast enough for a weeknight.
    • Make-ahead sauce - Prepare the sauce ahead, then sear the scallops just before serving.

    Chef's Tip: What Is Miso?
    Miso is a traditional Japanese fermented seasoning paste best known for miso soup, but it's useful far beyond soup. Made from soybeans and a cultured grain or legume base, miso adds savory depth, saltiness, and umami to sauces, dressings, marinades, glazes, soups, and vegetables. For another way to use miso, make this halibut with miso butter.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Miso sauce

    • Orange juice - Fresh squeezed is the best without added sugars or preservatives.
    • Miso - Sweet white miso (shiro miso) is the best option, I recommend organic as it is made from soy. It has a mild, slightly sweet flavor.
    • Honey - A mild honey, orange blossom, or wildflower honey.
    • Ginger - Minced in a jar is fast, but fresh, finely grated or zested ginger is good too.
    • Garlic - A fresh clove for best flavor.
    • Oil - Toasted sesame oil for flavor.

    Seared Scallops

    • Scallops - Jumbo dry sea scallops, ask if they are dry scallops for the best quality.
    • Oil - For searing teh scallops, use a clean, neutral oil.
    • White wine - Use a dry white wine, or fish broth or water. Dry sake is another option.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Chef's Tip: Is Miso Gluten-Free?
    Not always. Some traditional miso is made with barley or other gluten-containing grains, so gluten-free readers should check labels carefully and choose certified gluten-free miso when needed. I use South River sweet white miso as it has wonderful flavor, though it needs to be ordered online. Other brands such as Muso, Miso Master, or Clearspring offer gluten-free white miso, but always confirm on the label.

    How to Make Pan Seared Scallops with Miso Sauce

    Make Miso Sauce

    In a small saucepan, whisk together the orange juice, miso, honey, ginger, garlic, and sesame oil. Bring to a simmer and cook over low heat until slightly thickened and reduced. For a smooth sauce, press through a fine sieve. Keep warm if serving right away, or cool, refrigerate, and gently rewarm before serving.

    Pan Sear Scallops

    Because they are delicate, I recommend a non-stick pan to sear scallops. Check your non-stick pan. If it's scratchy and the coating is old and flaking, it's not safe to use. Toss it and invest in a new one.

    Unwrap the scallops and allow them to sit on the counter for about 30 minutes to get the chill off. Check to see if the abductor muscle is still attached (the 'foot'). If it is, remove it. It's chewy and not nice to eat. Some stores remove it for you.

    Searing jumbo scallops, in a non-stick pan.

    Ste 1 - Sprinkle the scallops with kosher or sea salt, ground black pepper. Heat the pan over medium to medium-high heat and add a small amuont of oil.

    Step 2 - Place the scallops in a single layer in the pan. Don't crowd them. Allow a golden crust to form. This will take a few minutes. Don't disturb the scallops while they are searing. Watch your heat and turn down if needed. You don't want them to burn.

    Step 3 - When you get a golden crust, gently turn them over. Pour in the wine (sake, broth or water) and immediately cover with the lid. Turn the heat to low.

    The scallops will finish cooking in about 1-2 minutes, depending on size and thickness. When done they should still be a little translucent in the center. Don't overcook them to maintain tenderness.

    Finishing the seared scallops.

    Serving Suggestions

    To serve, place cooked rice on a plate, top with the scallops and drizzle with the orange miso sauce. For garnish, sprinkle on chopped chives. A few drops of toasted sesame oil is nice too. Add a simple green side vegetable such as roast asparagus or broccolini.

    More Seafood Recipes

    From fin fish to shellfish, check out the Seafood Recipe Index page for more ideas.

    • A pistachio crusted salmon filet on a bed of bright green sugar snap peas with a fork.
      Baked Pistachio Crusted Salmon
    • Thai shrimp soup called Tom Yum in bowls with shrimp, jalapenos, cilantro, and limes.
      Shrimp Tom Yum Soup
    • black and white sesame salmon
      Sesame Crusted Salmon
    • Seared scallops with Hoisin
      Seared Scallops with Hoisin Glaze

    If You Make Pan Seared Scallops

    Please drop me a comment and let me know how you enjoy them. I love hearing from you and other readers benefit from your comments. Thanks for supporting my site.

    📖 Recipe

    Pan Seared Scallops with Miso Sauce

    Sally Cameron
    Big, plump sea scallops make an easy yet special dish for Valentines or any time of the year. You can pull this dinner together in about 30 minutes. To save time, make the rice and sauce ahead and heat them to serve. That beautiful purple-black rice in the photo is Forbidden Black rice.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 25 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, Main Course, Seafood
    Cuisine Asian
    Servings 4
    Calories 146 kcal

    Equipment

    • 10" non-stick pan

    Ingredients
      

    Orange Miso Sauce

    • 1 cup freshly squeezed orange juice
    • ¼ cup sweet white miso
    • 1 tablespoon honey
    • 1 tablespoon ginger organic minced in a jar, but fresh, finely grated is good too
    • 1 large garlic clove finely chopped or zested
    • 1-2 teaspoons toasted sesame oil

    Seared Scallops

    • 12 jumbo dry sea scallops approximately 1 pound
    • ½ teaspoon  sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 1-2 teaspoons neutral oil
    • ⅓ cup dry white wine sub fish broth or water

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Make the orange miso sauce

    • In a small saucepan, whisk together the orange juice, miso, honey, ginger, garlic, and sesame oil. Bring to a simmer and cook over low heat until slightly thickened and reduced. For a smooth sauce, press through a fine sieve. Keep warm if serving right away, or cool, refrigerate, and gently rewarm before serving.

    Prepare the scallops

    • Pat the scallops very dry with paper towels. If the side muscle (the abductor or foot) is still there, remove it, as they are tough to eat. Season both sides with salt and pepper.

    Sear the scallops

    • Heat a nonstick sauté pan over medium heat with the oil. When hot, add the scallops in a flat, single layer, leaving space between them. Cook until a golden crust forms on the first side, then turn carefully with tongs.

    Finish the scallops

    • Add the wine, broth, or water, cover immediately, and reduce the heat to low. Cook for about 2 minutes more, depending on size and thickness. The scallops should be just cooked through and slightly translucent in the center. Do not overcook. Total cooking time is usually 5-7 minutes.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 146kcalCarbohydrates: 18gProtein: 8gFat: 3gSaturated Fat: 0.5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gTrans Fat: 0.003gCholesterol: 11mgSodium: 1110mgPotassium: 281mgFiber: 1gSugar: 11gVitamin A: 141IUVitamin C: 31mgCalcium: 24mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Perfect Hard Boiled Eggs (Easy to Peel)

    06/04/2026 by Sally Cameron 7 Comments

    A small white bowl of peeled hard boiled eggs.

    Tired of hard boiled eggs that are hard to peel and look like a train wreck? Here's how to make perfect hard boiled eggs that are easy to peel every time. This method gives you smooth eggs with no green ring around the yolk (a sign of overcooking) that peel easily. From a chef and former caterer-trust me, it works. I've done a thousand eggs this way.

    A bowl of peeled perfectly clean hard boiled eggs with peeled and sliced eggs behind with shells.

    Does this easy peel egg method really work? The real test came when I had to make a huge batch of hard-boiled eggs-6 dozen-for an emergency catered event the next day. I didn't start cooking until 11:00 PM, and within an hour I had perfect eggs chilled and ready to go. Yes, it works-and it's still the method I use every few days for making egg salad.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Perfect Hard Boiled Eggs (Easy to Peel) Snapshot

    • Easy peel every time - Salt + vinegar, a thorough ice bath, and a quick tap-and-roll peel trick.
    • Smooth eggs, no green ring - Gentle boiling and fast icing prevent overcooking and the green ring.
    • Simple stovetop method - No special equipment, just a pot, timer, and bowl of ice.
    • Works even with fresh eggs - You don't need to "age" eggs to get easy peeling.

    Use hard boiled easy peel eggs in this flavorful green spinach salad with homemade vinaigrette.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    A dozen brown eggs in a carton, and little bowls of white vinegar and salt.
    • Eggs - Use large, clean, uncracked eggs. White or brown eggs both work. They do not need to be a week old for this method.
    • Vinegar - White vinegar is my go-to; apple cider vinegar works too. A splash helps keep the water "clean" if an egg cracks and supports easier peeling.
    • Salt - Any salt is fine. Add a little to the water along with the vinegar.

    Pleas see recipe card for measurements.

    Chef's Tip - Why I Use Salt + Vinegar (Plus the Ice Bath)
    I've found the most consistent easy-peel eggs come from a simple trio: salt and vinegar in the cooking water, followed by a thorough ice bath. Vinegar helps keep the water clean if an egg cracks and can slightly affect the shell surface, while salt helps the whites set more cleanly. The ice bath is essential-chilling eggs until very cold helps the egg release from the shell so peeling is easy. For best results, don't rush it: chill at least 10 minutes, and 30 minutes is even better. Use lots of ice.

    I learned the classic hard-boiled egg method decades ago-start eggs in cold water, bring to a boil, cover, and let them sit off heat. Sometimes it works, but peeling is hit-or-miss. This method is different: it's consistent, easy to repeat, and designed specifically for easy-peel hard-boiled eggs. Some people love pressure-cooker eggs, but this stovetop method is quick and reliable, without waiting for pressure rise or release.

    How to Make Perfect Hard Boiled Eggs (Step-by-Step)

    Choose a large enough pan to hold your eggs in a single layer. Add enough cold water so the eggs will covered by just an inch or two when you put them in.

    A pot of boiling water with salt being added to it to hard boil eggs.
    1. Add the vinegar and salt to the water. Bring the water to a boil over medium-high heat.
    Brown eggs in a pot being hard boiled.
    1. Gently lower the eggs into boiling water with a spider or large spotted spoon. Set timer for 15 minutes. Watch your heat and turn down as needed to a low gentle boil.
    An ice bath, a medium bowl filled with ice and cold water.
    1. While eggs are cooking, set up an ice bath with plenty of ice.
    Hard boiled eggs being chilled in an ice bath to cool.
    1. When time is up, immediately get the eggs into the ice bath. Allow them to chill 20-30 minutes.
    A small white bowl of peeled hard boiled eggs.

    5. Tap eggs on the counter around the center, roll on a folded kitchen towel, and peel.

    A plate of sliced open hard boiled eggs showing yellow centers.

    6. Eggs are ready to refrigerate or use and are good for up to 7 days.

    How to Peel Hard Boiled Eggs (Tap + Roll Trick)

    To peel hard-boiled eggs, tap the egg firmly on a hard surface around the center. Then roll it away from you on a folded kitchen towel with gentle pressure to crack the shell all over. Start peeling and the shell usually slips off easily-often in one or two big pieces. Every once in a while you'll get a stubborn egg, but this method gives the most consistent, easy-peel results.

    Hard boiled Egg Time Chart

    Yolk donenessCook time (large eggs)
    Jammy12 minutes
    Firm but creamy13–14 minutes
    Hard boiled15 minutes
    Ice bath10–30 minutes (until very cold)

    Serving Suggestions

    Hard boiled eggs are one of the most versatile proteins to keep in the fridge. Use them for quick snacks, add them to salads, or turn them into classic party favorites like deviled eggs and egg salad.

    • Snack - Peel, sprinkle with salt and pepper, and keep cold for grab-and-go.
    • Deviled eggs - A classic for holidays, picnics, and potlucks.
    • Egg salad - Great for sandwiches, wraps, or lettuce cups.
    • Niçoise-style salad - tuna, green beans, potatoes, olives.
    • Green salads - Top with wedges for extra protein.
    • Shrimp Louie salad - A perfect retro dinner salad moment.
    • Avocado stuffed eggs - Swap yolk filling for a creamy avocado dip.
    • Potato salad - Chop and fold in for a hearty, classic side.

    Troubleshooting, Tips, and Common Questions

    Why are my hard-boiled eggs hard to peel?

    Peeling problems usually come from not chilling long enough or not cracking the shell thoroughly. For best results, move eggs straight into an ice bath and let them get very cold, then tap and roll the egg on a folded towel to create lots of fine cracks before peeling.

    What causes the green ring?

    That gray-green ring is a sign of overcooking and/or slow cooling. Use a gentle boil and transfer eggs immediately to ice water to stop the cooking, then chill well for easy peel.

    How long do hard-boiled eggs last?

    Hard-boiled eggs keep for up to 7 days in the refrigerator. Store them unpeeled in a covered container for best texture, and peel as needed.

    Do I need older eggs?

    No. This method works well even with fresh eggs-the key is the salt + vinegar water, a thorough ice bath, and the tap-and-roll peeling technique.

    More Recipes With Eggs

    Hard boiled eggs are delicious turned into classic deviled eggs and added to salad for protein.

    • deviled eggs 2022
      Best Deviled Eggs Recipe (Step by Step)
    • A golden cheesy frittata in a cast iron skillet sprinkled with parmesan and chopped parsley.
      Ham and Cheese Frittata
    • A piece of golden baked breakfast casserole with eggs on a plate with a fork and dollop of sour cream on top.
      Cottage Cheese and Egg Bake
    • pumpkin polenta with poached eggs
      Cheesy Polenta (With Poached Eggs)

    ⭐️Did You Make Easy Peel Hard Boiled Eggs?

    If you make hard boiled eggs, please add your comment. I enjoy enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers. Got any questions? Just ask. I'm here to help.

    📖 Recipe

    A small white bowl of peeled hard boiled eggs.

    Perfect Hard Boiled Eggs Easy to Peel

    Sally Cameron
    For perfect hard-boiled eggs, follow this easy technique. Use the eggs for deviled eggs, snacks, appetizers, to add to green salads or make egg salad for a nice lunch. Use them same method with a smaller pan for less eggs. 
    5 from 4 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast, lunch, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12
    Calories 72 kcal

    Equipment

    • 2-5 quart pot 2 qt for 4-6 eggs, 5-6 qt for 12 eggs

    Ingredients
      

    • 12 large clean, uncracked, raw eggs
    • 2 tablespoons white vinegar
    • 1 teaspoons salt

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Prepare the eggs

    • Using a large enough pan that your eggs will sit flat in one layer, fill pot with enough cold water to cover eggs by 2 inches. Add vinegar and salt.

    Cook the eggs

    • Bring the water almost to a full boil. Reduce the heat to a gentle simmer and carefully lower the eggs into the water. A mesh skimmer makes this easy and helps prevent cracking. Once all of the eggs are in the pan, set a timer for 15 minutes.

    Prepare an ice bath

    • While the eggs cook, fill a large bowl with ice and water.

    Chill the eggs

    • When the eggs are done cooking, immediately transfer them to the ice bath. Chill until completely cold, about 30 minutes. Peel right away or refrigerate for 1-2 days until ready to use.

    Peel the eggs

    • To peel, gently tap an egg on the countertop, then roll it on a folded kitchen towel to loosen the shell. The shell should slip off easily. If any small shell fragments remain, rinse and pat the egg dry before using.

    Notes

    Cooked eggs will last about 7 days in an air tight container in the refrigerator.
    Pan size tip: Eggs should fit in a single layer and be covered by a few inches of water.
    • 3-6 eggs: 2-quart pan
    • 8-10 eggs: 4-5-quart pot
    • 12 eggs: wide 6-quart pot

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1eggCalories: 72kcalCarbohydrates: 0.4gProtein: 6gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.02gCholesterol: 186mgSodium: 71mgPotassium: 69mgSugar: 0.2gVitamin A: 270IUCalcium: 28mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Bakery Style Cinnamon Muffins (Gluten-Free)

    04/02/2026 by Sally Cameron 2 Comments

    A golden cinnamon muffin with dripping glaze on a muffin paper.

    These cinnamon muffins are for anyone who loves cinnamon rolls but doesn't want to fuss with yeast, rising time, or sticky dough. They bake up soft and bakery-style with big cinnamon-roll flavor thanks to a simple cinnamon-sugar layer and swirl that bakes right in. A quick powdered sugar drizzle gives them that classic finish in an easy gluten-free muffin. There's a dairy-free option, too.

    A cinnamon muffin with papar torn back drizzled with white icing.

    I loved cinnamon toast as a kid, and these cinnamon muffins are made for true cinnamon lovers. Fresh from the oven, they fill the kitchen with that warm, sweet cinnamon aroma everyone craves. A quick drizzle adds that classic cinnamon roll finish-sweet, nostalgic, and perfect for weekends, brunches, and holiday mornings. If you love cinnamon, bake a batch, then try to let them cool!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Cinnamon Muffin Recipe Highlights

    • Cinnamon roll flavor - Big cinnamon flavor without yeast, kneading, or rise time.
    • Soft, tender crumb - Bakery-style muffins with a moist, tender interior.
    • Quick sweet drizzle - A thick glaze adds the perfect finishing touch.
    • Cinnamon-sugar layer - Cinnamon sugar in the middle and on top gives these cinnamon sugar muffins vibes-without the donut-style coating.
    • Anytime treat - Great for breakfast, brunch, or an afternoon snack.

    Cinnamon swirl muffins are great served with this seasonal fresh fruit salad that is easily adaptable.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for cinnamon muffins in prep bowls ready for making muffins.
    • Gluten-free flour blend - Use a good gluten-free blend. I tested with King Arthur Measure-for-Measure (M4M).
    • Xanthan gum (optional) - Add only if your GF flour blend doesn't include it.
    • Baking powder - Helps the muffins rise with a nice, domed top.
    • Cinnamon - Warm, cozy flavor in every bite. See cinnamon notes below.
    • Eggs - Provide structure and tenderness.
    • Sugar - Sweetens the batter, helps with moisture and browning.
    • Milk - Whole milk is preferred for better flavor and tenderness.
    • Oil - A neutral clean oil keeps the muffins moist and tender.
    • Vanilla extract - I prefer real vanilla. Rounds out the cinnamon nicely.
    • Golden brown sugar - For the cinnamon swirl, adds caramel notes.
    • Powdered sugar - For the sweet drizzle, or use powdered monk fruit.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, and salt.

    Chef's Tip: Which cinnamon is best?
    Cinnamon labels can be confusing. Most "regular" grocery-store cinnamon is cassia-classic, warm, and totally fine for baking. Ceylon ("true cinnamon") is lighter and more delicate, so the flavor is softer. Vietnamese (Saigon) cinnamon is bold, sweet, and very aromatic-perfect for cinnamon-forward muffins like these. Korintje is a smooth, "bakery-style" cinnamon that's usually less intense than Vietnamese and great all-purpose. Great options for cinnamon muffins! My favorite is Vietnamese cinnamon.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Dairy-free - Use unsweetened oat milk and plant-based butter.
    • Reduced sugar - Use a golden monk fruit blend in the swirl (not the batter), and a powdered monk fruit blend in the drizzle.

    A cinnamon muffin adds more "oomph" to breakfast alongside this easy chia pudding.

    Chef's Tip - Xanthan Gum in Gluten-Free Baking
    Xanthan gum in GF flour blends helps gluten-free batters and doughs hold together by adding structure and elasticity-similar to what gluten provides. It improves texture and reduces crumbling. If your flour blend already includes xanthan gum, you don't need to add more. Add ¼ teaspoon per cup of flour.

    How to Make Cinnamon Muffins

    Pre-heat oven to 375°F (standard bake) and line a 12-well muffin pan with muffin papers.

    Brown sugar and cinnamon mixed in a small bowl for muffins.
    1. Combine brown sugar and cinnamon in a small bowl and reserve.
    Sifting dry ingredients together for making cinnamon muffins.
    1. Add flour, baking powder, cinnamon, and salt to a sifter (or sieve) over a bowl and sift to lighten.
    Mixing eggs, milk, oil, and wet ingredients for muffins in a glass bowl with a whisk.
    1. Whisk eggs, milk, oil, sugar, vanilla until smooth.
    Combining wet and dry ingredients to make cinnamon muffin batter.
    1. Mix dry and wet ingredients into a smooth batter and allow to rest for 20 minutes to hydrate the GF flour.
    Cinnamon muffin batter portioned into tulip papers in a muffin pan.
    1. Fill muffin cups with 2 tablespoons of batter, then ½ teaspoon of the cinnamon sugar, add 2 more tablespoons of batter, top with another ½ teaspoon of cinnamon sugar and swirl the top. A #30 scooper make this easier and faster.
    Baked cinnamon roll muffins in the muffin pan cooling.
    1. Bake for 22-25 minutes, until tops spring back when touched and a toothpick or cake tester comes out clean with moist crumbs (205°-210°F). Cool 10 minutes then move to a wire rack for complete cooling. Powdered sugar drizzle is optional after cooling.
    A golden cinnamon muffin with dripping glaze on a muffin paper.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve cinnamon muffins warmed up (quick microwave) or at room temperature. They're great for weekend breakfasts, brunch spreads, and holiday mornings. Try them alongside a breakfast main like this ham and cheese frittata. For the best drizzle, add it once muffins are mostly cool before serving so it stays thick and pretty on top.

    Storage

    Store completely cooled muffins in an airtight container or zip-top bag at room temperature for 2-3 days. Because the batter uses oil (and gluten-free blends tend to hold moisture well), these muffins stay surprisingly soft. Store loosely covered at room temperature. Tops may soften slightly due to the cinnamon sugar.

    Freezing

    Although I have not tried freezing these muffins, they should freeze fine. Freeze cooled muffins in a freezer-safe bag or airtight container for 2-3 months. Thaw at room temperature or warm briefly in the microwave, then add the drizzle after thawing for best texture.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make these dairy-free?

    Yes. Use your favorite unsweetened dairy-free milk in the batter and glaze. Choose one with a neutral flavor, like oat milk, for the best results.

    How do I keep the cinnamon sugar from disappearing into the batter?

    Layering it in works well. Add half the batter to the muffin wells, sprinkle with cinnamon sugar, top with more batter, then finish with more cinnamon sugar on top. A light swirl on the surface helps create visible cinnamon ribbons without over-mixing the batter. Using a #30 scooper makes it faster and easier

    How do I make the glaze thicker or thinner?

    To thin the glaze, add more milk 1 teaspoon at a time. To thicken it, whisk in a little more powdered sugar until it reaches your desired consistency.

    Can I skip the glaze?

    Yes. The muffins are still delicious without it, but the glaze adds a sweet finish that gives them a more cinnamon-roll-style feel.

    Why are my muffins dense instead of light and fluffy?

    Be sure to sift the dry ingredients, measure carefully, and avoid over-mixing the batter. Too much flour or over-mixing can make the muffins heavier.


    More Muffin Recipes

    Love to bake muffins? Here are four more gluten-free muffin recipes to try. From banana muffins, to fresh strawberry, carrot cake, and zucchini. Easy and tasty options.

    • Banana muffins studded with mini chocolate chips wrapped in muffin papers.
      Gluten-Free Banana Muffins (Dairy-Free)
    • Gluten Free Strawberry Muffins
    • carrot cake muffins
      Gluten-Free Carrot Cake Muffins (dairy-free)
    • Zucchini Applesauce Muffins | AFoodCentricLife.com
      Gluten-Free Zucchini Muffins

    If You Make Cinnamon Muffins

    Please leave a comment and let me know. I love hearing from you and your comments help other readers. And please give it a ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐. Thanks for supporting my site!

    📖 Recipe

    A golden cinnamon muffin with dripping glaze on a muffin paper.

    Cinnamon Muffins with Glaze (Gluten-Free)

    Sally Cameron
    Soft, cinnamon muffins with all the cozy flavor of a cinnamon roll-no yeast or rising time required. Finished with a thick cream cheese drizzle (thicker than icing, thinner than frosting) for the perfect sweet finish.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 22 minutes mins
    Total Time 37 minutes mins
    Course Breakfast, Brunch
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12
    Calories 286 kcal

    Equipment

    • 12-well muffin tin
    • muffin liner papers regular or tulip
    • #30 disher/cookie scoop optional but really handy and inexpensive
    • Flour sifter optional but easier than a sieve
    • Digital scale optional but accurate

    Ingredients
      

    Cinnamon sugar swirl

    • ⅓ cup packed golden brown sugar or golden monk fruit blend
    • 2 teaspoons cinnamon
    • pinch salt

    Muffins

    • 2 ½ cups GF flour blend (11 ounces) I use King Arthur Gluten-free M4M, has xanthan gum.
    • ½ teaspoon xanthan gum (only for flour blends without it)
    • 2 ½ teaspoons baking powder
    • 2 ½ teaspoons cinnamon preferably Vietnamese cinnamon
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 3 large eggs
    • ¾ cup granulated sugar
    • 1 ¼ cups whole milk
    • ⅓ cup oil
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract

    Glaze (optional)

    • ⅓ cup powdered sugar or powdered monk fruit blend
    • ¼ teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 1-2 teaspoons milk

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Getting started

    • Pre-heat the oven to 375°F. Line the muffin pan with paper liners, tulip papers or regular.
    • Make the cinnamon sugar swirl by blending sugar and cinnamon. Save until needed.

    Mix dry ingredients

    • Sift the dry ingredients, flour, baking powder, cinnamon, and salt, into a bowl using a flour sifter or a fine sieve. **If your gluten-free flour blend does not have xanthan gum, add ½ teaspoon.
      Note - For the most accurate results, weigh the flour. If measuring by cups, stir the flour first to aerate it, then scoop and level.

    Mix wet ingredients

    • In a medium bowl, whisk eggs, milk, oil, sugar and vanilla. Add to dry ingredients and stir just until combined. Do not overmix.
    • Rest the batter for 20 minutes to hydrate the batter. Batter will be thick but scoopable.

    Portion the batter, layer in cinnamon sugar

    • The #30 cookie scoop makes portioning quick and neat; use 2 scoops per muffin cup. If you don't have one, use a spoon or measuring cup and add about 2 tablespoons at a time.
      Add 1 scoop of batter to each muffin well, sprinkle with ½ teaspoon cinnamon sugar, then top with a second scoop of batter. Finish with another ½ teaspoon cinnamon sugar and swirl the top lightly with the tip of a paring knife or table knife.

    Bake muffins

    • Bake muffins at 375°F for 22-25 minutes. Muffins are done when tops spring back when touched and a tester comes out with moist crumbs (not wet batter), 205°F - 210°F. Cool 10 minutes on a wire rack.

    Add drizzle if using (optional)

    • Stir powdered sugar (or powdered monk fruit) until smooth and thick-but-spoonable, then drizzle over cooled muffins.

    Notes

    Cinnamon Notes:
    • "Cinnamon" is cassia-classic, warm, and totally fine for baking.
    • Ceylon ("true cinnamon") is lighter and more delicate, so the flavor is softer.
    • Vietnamese (Saigon) cinnamon is bold, sweet, and very aromatic-perfect for cinnamon-forward muffins like these. This is what I use. 
    • Korintje is a smooth, "bakery-style" cinnamon that's usually less intense than Vietnamese and great all-purpose.
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 286kcalCarbohydrates: 47gProtein: 4gFat: 9gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 0.03gCholesterol: 50mgSodium: 215mgPotassium: 93mgFiber: 1gSugar: 20gVitamin A: 111IUVitamin C: 0.03mgCalcium: 103mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Greek Chicken Meatballs

    04/09/2026 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    A rice bowl of Greek chicken meatballs with cucumbers, tomatoes, tzatziki, herbs, and olives with olive oil.

    These Greek chicken meatballs are light, tender, and packed with Mediterranean flavor. Made with lean ground chicken, garlic, onion, a little Greek feta, fresh herbs, and bright lemon zest, they're perfect for an easy weeknight dinner. Serve them with lemon-herb rice, a fresh cucumber-tomato salad, or build a Mediterranean bowl with tzatziki.

    A grain bowl filled with greek chicken meatballs, rice, tomatoes, cucumbers, olive, and tzatziki sauce.

    I love meatballs, and this Greek chicken meatballs recipe is a lighter take on Greek keftedes-made with ground chicken instead of beef (or beef and pork) and baked instead of fried. They're comforting, flavorful, and naturally portioned into bite-sized perfection, with feta, fresh herbs, and lemon zest adding bright Mediterranean flavor for a tender, light, and perfectly moist meatball-especially served with homemade tzatziki sauce.

    Greek Chicken Meatballs Recipe Highlights

    • Bold Mediterranean flavor - Garlic, oregano, parsley, dill, mint, lemon, and feta bring bright Greek-inspired flavor to every bite.
    • Light and tender - Made with ground chicken, breadcrumbs, milk, and egg for meatballs that stay moist, not dry.
    • Versatile - Serve with rice, orzo, Greek salad, roasted vegetables, or tuck into pita with tzatziki.
    • Meal-prep friendly - They reheat well and freeze beautifully for easy lunches and dinners, made with ground chicken.

    For more Greek flavors, make this Greek Lemon Chicken Soup.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for Greek chicken meatballs in prep bowls on the counter.
    • Ground chicken - Use a dark-meat blend or a higher-fat grind for the most tender, juicy meatballs. Notes below.
    • Breadcrumbs - Use gluten-free or regular. Acts as a binder to keep the meatballs light and tender.
    • Milk - Combines with breadcrumbs to form a panade (the secret to tender meatballs). Dairy-free notes below.
    • Egg - Helps bind the mixture so the meatballs hold together.
    • Garlic - Fresh cloves add robust, classic Greek flavor.
    • Onion - Red onion is common in Greek cooking, but yellow or brown onion works well too.
    • Oregano - A must for Greek flavor; dried works great here.
    • Fresh parsley - Adds freshness and color.
    • Fresh mint - Adds a bright, refreshing Greek note (optional but wonderful).
    • Dill - Another classic Greek herb that pairs beautifully with chicken and feta.
    • Lemon zest - Brightens the entire mixture without adding extra moisture.
    • Feta - Greek feta adds salty tang and helps keep chicken meatballs moist; buy a block and crumble or finely grate it yourself..

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and black pepper.

    Chef's Tip: Buying Ground Chicken
    Skip the 99% lean ground chicken
    for meatballs-it tends to bake up dry and crumbly. For the best flavor and texture, look for ground chicken with a little more fat. Since packages don't always list a lean/fat ratio, use the nutrition label: aim for about 8-10 grams of fat per 4-ounce serving. That usually means a blend of white and dark meat, which stays tender and moist. Remember, fat = flavor.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Ground turkey - Swap in ground turkey (preferably dark meat).
    • For dairy-free - Use unsweetened almond milk and use a dairy-free feta alternative.

    For another meatball recipe, try this Meatball Stroganoff recipe.

    How To Make Greek Chicken Meatballs

    Chef's tip: What keeps chicken meatballs tender?
    A classic binding method called a panade, made with breadcrumbs and milk, helps keep chicken meatballs tender and moist. Let the breadcrumbs hydrate before adding the ground chicken, then mix gently so the meatballs stay light instead of dense.

    Pre-heat the oven to 375°F. Line a sheet tray with parchment paper.

    A mix of breadcrumbs and milk, a binder for chicken meatballs, in a bowl.
    1. Add milk and breadcrumbs to a bowl and mix. Allow to stand 5 minutes.
    Glass bowl with egg, herbs, onion, breadcrumbs and milk for a meatball base mix.
    1. Add onion, cheese, egg, herbs, garlic-all except the meat.
    Mixed base ingredients for Greek chicken meatballs before the meat.
    1. Mix the meatball base mix well.
    Adding pink chicken meat to a bowl of breadcrumbs, herbs, egg, and more as a chicken meatballs mix.
    1. Add the ground chicken and mix well but gently, don't overwork the meat to keep meatballs tender. Using gloves helps.
    Portioning Greek chicken meatballs mix onto a baking tray with a scoop.
    1. Portion the meatball mix onto the lined baking sheet, using a disher (aka scoop) keeps them perfect sized. After portioning, roll them into round balls in your palms. Bake for 16-17 minutes until 165°F.
    A white bowl of golden Greek chicken meatballs sprinkled with red onion and herbs.

    Serving Suggestions

    • Mediterranean rice bowl - Serve over rice with cucumber, tomatoes, red onion, kalamata olives, and tzatziki for a balanced meal.
    • Orzo or other grains - Pair with lemony orzo, farro, or quinoa and fresh herbs.
    • Add a salad - Serve with this tossed Greek Salad with a Greek vinaigrette.
    • As an appetizer - Serve with homemade tzatziki for dipping (or a lemony tahini sauce) as a hearty party bite or appetizer buffet.

    Storing and Freezing

    Refrigerator: Let the meatballs cool, then store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.

    Freezer: Greek chicken meatballs freeze great. Cool completely, then freeze on a parchment-lined sheet pan until firm (about 1-2 hours). Transfer to a freezer bag or airtight container and freeze for up to 2-3 months.

    Reheating: Warm in a 350°F oven, covered in a bowl, until heated through, or microwave on lower power for a few minutes until hot.

    More Greek-Inspired Recipes

    Craving more Greek or Mediterranean flavor? Try one of these recipes next.

    • Golden creamy Greek salad dressing in a glass jar on a counter.
      Greek Dressing Recipe (Greek Vinaigrette)
    • Tomato and cucumber salad, with red onion, feta, and garbanzo beans with greek dressing.
      Cucumber Tomato and Feta Salad (Greek Salad)
    • A bowl of Greek avgolemono chicken soup with fresh dill in a white bowl.
      Greek Avgolemono Soup (Lemon Chicken Soup)
    • A bowl of cream Greek Tzatziki with dill and olive oil drizzle with raw veggies and crackers.
      Easy Tzatziki Recipe (Greek Yogurt Sauce)

    If You Make Greek Chicken Meatballs

    Please leave comment and let me know! I love to hear from you and your comments help other readers too.

    📖 Recipe

    A rice bowl of Greek chicken meatballs with cucumbers, tomatoes, tzatziki, herbs, and olives with olive oil.

    Greek Chicken Meatballs

    Sally Cameron
    Greek Chicken Meatballs
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 25 minutes mins
    Cook Time 13 minutes mins
    Total Time 38 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, Entree, main
    Cuisine Greek
    Servings 4 Yield 31-32 meatballs
    Calories 298 kcal

    Equipment

    • ½ sheet rimmed baking sheet
    • Parchment paper pre-cut pieces are easiest to have on hand
    • #40 disher aka cookie scoop optional but so handy and inexpensive

    Ingredients
      

    • 6 tablespoons plain dry breadcrumbs gluten-free if needed
    • 6 tablespoons milk dairy or non-dairy, oat or almond
    • 1 large egg
    • ½ cup finely chopped onion red, yellow or brown
    • ⅓ cup Greek feta cheese, finely crumbled or grated about 1 ounce
    • 1 tablespoons chopped Italian parsley
    • 2 teaspoons fresh chopped dill or ¾ teaspoon dried
    • 1 ½ teaspoons fresh chopped mint
    • ½ teaspoon dried oregano
    • ¾ teaspoon lemon zest
    • 2 large garlic cloves microplaned or zested
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1 pound ground chicken 8-10% fat per serving read the label, not 99%

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Line the baking sheet with the parchment and prehet the oven to 375°F.

    Make meatball mix

    • Add the breadcrumbs, milk, and egg to a medium bowl and mix to blend. Let rest for 5 minutes to hydrate the breadcrumbs. Add the onion, feta, herbs, lemon zest, garlic, salt, and pepper.
    • Add the ground chicken and mix gently with your hands. Disposable gloves make this easier. Do not overmix, which can make the meatballs tough.

    Form meatballs

    • Using a tablespoon or a #40 scoop/disher, portion the meatball mixture and roll into balls with your palms. Place on the parchment-lined baking sheet. The meatballs can be placed close together to fit on one sheet pan.

    Bake meatballs

    • Bake for 16-18 minutes or until the meatballs are 165°F in the center.
      They are ready to serve or chill and refrigerate and freeze.

    Notes

    If you're only option is 99% lean ground chicken, add 1-2 tablespoons of olive oil per pound to boost moisture and mimic the richness of dark meat.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 298kcalCarbohydrates: 15gProtein: 26gFat: 15gSaturated Fat: 5gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 5gTrans Fat: 0.1gCholesterol: 158mgSodium: 494mgPotassium: 727mgFiber: 1gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 252IUVitamin C: 4mgCalcium: 145mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Italian Antipasto Pasta Salad

    07/02/2026 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    A bowl of antipasto salad with pasta, herbs, tomatoes, mozzarella pearls, and olives.

    Antipasto pasta salad is a colorful Italian pasta salad loaded with salami, mozzarella, artichoke hearts, olives, tomatoes, and pepperoncini tossed in a zesty homemade Italian vinaigrette. It's easy to make ahead, perfect for picnics, potlucks, BBQs, and summer entertaining, and serves as both a hearty side dish and a light meal.

    A round bowl of colorful antipasto salad with rotini pasta, tomatoes, olives, mozzarella, and herbs.

    If you love a classic antipasto platter, this pasta salad brings all of those bold Italian flavors together in one bowl. With savory salami, creamy mozzarella, crisp vegetables, briny olives, and tangy dressing, it's a crowd-pleasing recipe made for sharing.

    Antipasto Pasta Salad Recipe Snapshot

    • Make-ahead friendly - Even better after the flavors have time to mingle.
    • Perfect for gatherings - Great for BBQs, potlucks, picnics, and summer entertaining.
    • Easy to double - Use 1 pound of dry pasta for a crowd.
    • Gluten-free option - Use your favorite short gluten-free pasta, such as rotini, fusilli, penne, or elbows.

    If you love antipasto platters and salads, try them as antipasto skewers for a fun appetizer.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Antipasto salad ingredients in prep bowls ready to go.
    • Pasta - Use regular or gluten-free short pasta. Rotini or fusilli are ideal because the spirals catch the dressing and bits of antipasto ingredients.
    • Salami - Dice a small whole salami, or chop sliced salami into bite-sized pieces.
    • Tomatoes - Use cherry or grape tomatoes for sweetness, color, and easy prep.
    • Olives - Use Kalamata olives, green Castelvetrano olives, or a mix for color and briny flavor.
    • Artichoke hearts - Buy water-packed quartered artichoke hearts, drain well.
    • Mozzarella - Perline, the tiny mozzarella balls, are perfect and bite-sized, or use Ciliegine, halved.
    • Pepperoncini - Add tangy, mildly spicy flavor. Buy whole and slice them yourself, or use pre-sliced.
    • Herbs - Chopped fresh oregano and parsley add fresh Italian flavor and color.
    • Dressing - Italian dressing is classic for antipasto pasta salad. Use my easy homemade Italian dressing recipe, or a good-quality bottled dressing if needed.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Mozzarella - If you can't find perline, use ciliegine and halve or quarter them into bite-sized pieces. Cubed fresh mozzarella works too.
    • Other cheeses - Cubed Fontina is nice in place of the mozzarella, and provolone works well too.
    • Roasted peppers - Use jarred roasted red peppers, drained and sliced.
    • Tomato variation - Swap fresh tomatoes for chopped sun-dried tomatoes or roasted cherry tomatoes when you want a richer, more intense flavor.

    How to Make an Antipasto Pasta Salad

    If making homemade Italian dressing, make it while the pasta is boiling.

    Golden rotini pasta pouring into a pot of boiling water.
    1. Bring a large pot of lightly salted water to a boil and cook the pasta according to pacakge directions.
    Pasta draining in a stainless steel sieve.
    1. Drain pasta and toss with a few drops of olive oil, sprinkle with a little salt.
    Cooked corkscrew pasta cooling on a sheet tray for making pasta salad.
    1. Pour pasta onto a flat rimmed baking sheet to cool quickly, and reduce gumminess.
    Halved tomatoes, diced salami, and chopped artichoke hearts for an antipasto pasta salad.
    1. While the pasta is cooking or cooling, halve the tomatoes, halve the artichoke hearts, and dice the salami.
    A bowl of antipasto salad with pasta, herbs, tomatoes, mozzarella pearls, and olives.
    1. When the pasta is cool, combine everything in a large bowl and toss together. Be sure olives and cheese are well drained. If serving soon, toss with about ½ cup of the Italian dressing then herbs. Refrigerate until serving, then add more dressing as needed.

    Make-Ahead Tip

    Italian antipasto pasta salad is even better after the flavors have time to mingle. Make it up to 1 day ahead, but hold back a little dressing to refresh the salad before serving. Toss again, taste, and add more dressing, salt, pepper, or herbs as needed.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve antipasto pasta salad chilled or slightly cool from the refrigerator. Serve it as a hearty side dish with grilled whole chicken legs, steak, burgers, baby back ribs, or enjoy it as a light main dish for lunch. Before serving, toss again and refresh with a little extra Italian dressing if needed.

    How to Store Antipasto Pasta Salad

    Store Italian antipasto pasta salad in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. The pasta will absorb some of the dressing as it sits and may firm up after refrigeration. Before serving, toss well and add a little extra Italian dressing to refresh the flavor and texture.

    For the best color and freshness, add the herbs shortly before serving if making it ahead.

    Here's another great pasta salad, my Mediterranean pasta salad with cucumber, mint, and feta.

    More Summer Salad Recipes

    Summer is the perfect time for salads, and here are more recipes for your inspiration. Be sure to check out the Salad Recipes Index page as well.

    • Bright colored avocado , black bean, and corn salad with tomatoes and jalapenos in a white bowl.
      Black Bean Avocado and Corn Salad
    • Cold green bean salad with cherry tomatoes, corn, feta and red onion in a white bowl.
      Cold Green Bean Salad With Tomatoes and Corn
    • Watermelon salad ready to serve with cucumber, feta, basil, shallots.
      Easy Watermelon Basil Salad with Feta Cheese
    • Tomato and cucumber salad, with red onion, feta, and garbanzo beans with greek dressing.
      Cucumber Tomato and Feta Salad (Greek Salad)

    If You Make This Pasta Salad

    If you make this pasta salad, be sure to drop me a comment and let me know how you enjoyed it. I love hearing from you and your comments helpother readers too. Thanks for supporting my site!


    📖 Recipe

    A bowl of antipasto salad with pasta, herbs, tomatoes, mozzarella pearls, and olives.

    Antipasto Pasta Salad

    Sally Cameron
    Antipasto pasta salad is a colorful Italian pasta salad with salami, mozzarella, artichoke hearts, olives, tomatoes, and pepperoncini tossed in a zesty homemade Italian vinaigrette. Make it ahead for picnics, potlucks, BBQs, or easy summer meals.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 20 minutes mins
    Cook Time 13 minutes mins
    Total Time 33 minutes mins
    Course pasta, Salad
    Cuisine Italian
    Servings 6 to 8
    Calories 395 kcal

    Equipment

    • 5-6 quart pot for cooking pasta
    • strainer or sieve

    Ingredients
      

    • 8 ounces fusilli pasta, gluten-free or regular pasta or other small shape
    • 5-6 ounces dry salami (Genoa) diced or chopped
    • 6 ounces Perline mozzarella drained well, save extra in the brine
    • 1 cup cherry or grape tomatoes halved
    • ¾ cup quartered artichoke hearts in water drained well, chopped if needed
    • ½ cup olives, black pitted Kalamata or green Caselvestrano or a little of both
    • ⅓ cup sliced pepperoncini
    • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley
    • ½ tablespoons fresh chopped oregano
    • ½ - ¾ cup Italian dressing more as needed

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Cook the pasta

    • Cook the pasta according to the package directions until al dente. Drain, rinse briefly under cold water, and spread on a baking sheet or large platter to cool.

    Prep the antipasto ingredients

    • While the pasta cools, chop the salami, halve the tomatoes if needed, drain and chop the artichoke hearts, slice the pepperoncini, and cut the roasted peppers into strips. Drain the mozzarella pearls if packed in water.

    Make the dressing

    • Whisk together the Italian dressing ingredients in a small bowl or shake them in a jar. If using my homemade Italian dressing, prepare it ahead of time.

    Assemble the salad

    • Add the cooled pasta, salami, mozzarella, tomatoes, olives, artichoke hearts, pepperoncini, roasted peppers, oregano, and parsley to a large bowl.

    Dress and chill

    • Pour the dressing over the salad and toss gently to combine. Refrigerate for 30 minutes before serving to allow the flavors to mingle.

    Serve

    • Taste and adjust seasoning if needed. Serve chilled or slightly cool from the refrigerator.

    Notes

    Note for gluten-free pasta - I use the Rummo GF Fusilli cooked for the full 13 minutes. It works well in pasta salad and does not get mushy. I have not tested other brands.
    Variations:
    • Cheese - If you can't find perline, use ciliegine and halve or quarter them into bite-sized pieces.  Cubed Fontina is nice in place of the mozzarella, and provolone works well too.
    • Roasted peppers - Use jarred roasted red peppers, drained and sliced.
    • Tomato variation - Swap fresh tomatoes for drained, chopped, sun-dried tomatoes or roasted cherry tomatoes when you want a richer, more intense flavor.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cupCalories: 395kcalCarbohydrates: 36gProtein: 18gFat: 19gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 8gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 37mgSodium: 1329mgPotassium: 308mgFiber: 3gSugar: 5gVitamin A: 537IUVitamin C: 11mgCalcium: 253mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Best Deviled Eggs Recipe (Step by Step)

    04/18/2011 by Sally Cameron 10 Comments

    deviled eggs 2022

    The best deviled eggs start with perfectly cooked hard-boiled eggs: smooth whites, creamy yellow yolks, and no green rings. Add a creamy, tangy filling made with mayonnaise, mustard, and simple seasonings, then finish with fresh herbs or fun garnishes for a classic appetizer everyone loves. I've been told many times that I make the best deviled eggs, and this is the tried-and-true recipe I've made for years.

    Close up of deviled eggs with creamy golden filling sprinkled with rusty red paprika.

    For deviled eggs that look as good as they taste, the hard-boiled eggs matter. I don't worry about using week-old eggs; I hard boil eggs every week and fresh eggs peel just fine when they're cooked and chilled properly. Start with clean, un-cracked eggs, cook them for 15 minutes using my method, then move them straight into an ice bath to stop the cooking and make peeling easier.

    Best Deviled Eggs Recipe Snapshot

    • Classic crowd-pleaser - Deviled eggs are always welcome at holidays, parties, potlucks, and summer gatherings.
    • Creamy, tangy filling - Smooth yolks, mayonnaise, mustard, and simple seasonings make the filling flavorful and balanced.
    • Make-ahead friendly - Cook and peel the eggs ahead, then fill them closer to serving time.
    • Easy to customize - Finish with paprika, fresh herbs, capers, bacon, or other fun garnishes.

    For another appetizer that's bite-sized and easy to make ahead, make these easy caprese skewers with cherry tomatoes and mini mozzarella balls.

    Chef's Tip: Mayonnaise Thickness Matters. Mayonnaise varies by brand, and a thinner mayo can make deviled egg filling too loose for piping. Start with less than you think you need, then add more gradually until the filling is smooth, creamy, and firm enough to hold its shape, especially if you are piipng it.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    • Eggs - Use clean, fresh, uncracked eggs. They do not need to be a week old if you follow my cooking and chilling method.
    • Mayonnaise - Use your favorite mayonnaise for a creamy filling.
    • Mustard - Use Dijon mustard, yellow mustard, whole-grain mustard, or a combination of them.
    • Vinegar - Use white vinegar or apple cider vinegar in the cooking water, and apple cider vinegar or lemon juice in the filling for brightness.
    • Horseradish - Optional, but it adds a little extra flavor punch. Drain it of liquid first.
    • Garnishes - A sprinkle of paprika is classic, but there are lots of fun options. See the garnishing chart below.
    • Dry mustard - Optional, but it adds extra mustard flavor depth and helps keep the filling firm enough to pipe neatly (if piping).

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, plus the salt and pepper. I use white pepper in deviled eggs so the filling stays smooth and creamy-looking without black specks.

    Chef's Tip: Why Vinegar & Salt? I add vinegar and salt to the cooking water every time I make hard-boiled eggs. While there are different opinions on exactly why it helps, I've found it makes the eggs easier to peel after cooking and rapid, thorough chilling. I've used this method for years with consistently good results.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Avocado deviled eggs - Blend half of a ripe avocado into the filling for a creamy texture and fresh flavor, or replace the filling entirely with your favorite guacamole.
    • Sun-dried tomato deviled eggs - Stir or blend a little sun-dried tomato pesto into the filling until smooth and creamy. Garnish with chopped herbs or a small piece of sun-dried tomato.
    • Spicy deviled eggs - Add a dash of hot sauce, a pinch of cayenne, or finely chopped jalapeño to the filling.

    How to Make Deviled Eggs

    Hard Boil the Eggs

    An ice bath, a medium bowl filled with ice and cold water.
    1. Set up and ice bath to chill the eggs after cooking. Fill a large bowl with half water and ice.
    Brown eggs in a pot being hard boiled.
    1. Bring water to a boil in a pot large enough to fit eggs in a single layer. and to cover by 2". Add vinegar and salt. When water boils, gently lower eggs into pot. Turn heat down to a low simmer and cook 15 minutes.

    Peel the Eggs

    Place a folded kitchen towel on the counter. Tap the egg around the center to crack the shell on the counter, then roll the egg gently with the palm of your hand, pushing away from you on the towel. The shells will peel right off most of the time, but there is always a stubborn one.

    Hard boiled eggs being chilled in an ice bath to cool.
    1. At end of 15 minutes, lift eggs out of pot and immediately into ice water. Chill until ice cold, 30 minutes.
    A small white bowl of peeled hard boiled eggs.
    1. Peel eggs by tapping them on the counter, then rolling gently on a folded kitchen towel, then peeling.

    Make the Filling

    A plate of sliced open hard boiled eggs showing yellow centers.
    1. Halve the eggs, then pop the yolks out, and add to a food processor.
    Ingredients for deviled egg filling in the workbowl of a food processor.
    1. Add the mustard, horseradish, mayo, vinegar, seasoning, and pulse until smooth and creamy.

    Deviled Egg Filling Without a Food Processor

    There are two ways that work. One, place the yolks in a bowl and mash them with a fork until they are fine and crumbly. Add the other ingredients and stir (or whisk) until creamy and smooth as possible. Refrigerate the filling until needed.

    One more way without a food processor is to use a sieve and push the yolks through with the back of a spoon or flexible spatula. This method insures a smoother filling and less lumps after mixing.

    FiIling Deviled Eggs

    A piping bag filled with creamy yellow deviled egg filling ready for piping.

    You can fill deviled eggs with a piping bag, zip-top bag, or a spoon. For the neatest presentation, I like using a disposable piping bag fitted with a large star tip or plain tip.

    To fill the bag easily, place it tip-side down in a tall container, such as a blender jar or large glass, and fold the top edge over the rim. Spoon in the filling, filling the bag about three-quarters full. Twist the top closed and secure with a rubber band if needed. When ready to fill the eggs, snip the tip end if needed, then gently squeeze the filling into the egg white halves.

    A zip-top bag works too. Add the filling to the bag, press out extra air, seal, and snip off one corner for piping. Or keep it simple and use a teaspoon to fill the eggs.

    For transporting deviled eggs, pack the egg white halves in a sturdy container and keep the filling in the piping bag. When you arrive, pipe the filling into the eggs, add garnishes, and serve.

    Hard boiled egg halved filled with deviled egg filling on a white plate.
    1. Pipe the deviled egg filling into the gg halves just before serving.
    Deviled eggs garnished iwht red paprika and a sprinkle of herbs.
    1. Garnish as desired.

    Tips for the Best Deviled Eggs

    • Cook extra eggs for parties in case some whites tear or the yolks are small (and you need more filling).
    • Peel the eggs immediately after the ice bath, then refrigerate them peeled in an airtight container until ready to fill.
    • Start with less mayonnaise than you think you need and add more gradually until you reach the texture you want for piping.
    • Mayonnaise thickness varies by brand, so adjust accordingly.
    • To halve the eggs, use a thin, sharp knife and wipe the blade clean between each cut for neat, smooth edges.
    • If you like your deviled eggs piled high, use the extra yolks from the additional eggs to make a more generous filling.

    The Best Garnishes for Deviled Eggs

    Here are 14 variations for deviled eggs, and try my recipe for smoked salmon on a pellet grill for another nice topping.

    Paprika, regular or smokedBay shrimp or crab
    Chopped fresh dill or parsleyChopped green onion
    Sliced jalapeno peppersCooked bay shrimp
    AvocadoSun-dried tomatoes
    Crisp crumbled baconBlack or green olives
    Radish slicesPickle relish
    CapersCherry tomato halves
    A chart of garnishing ideas for deviled eggs.

    Making Deviled Eggs Ahead of Time

    To make deviled eggs ahead of time, hard boil the eggs and make the filling a day or two ahead. Keep them refrigerated and separated. Fill when ready to serve. The fastest way is using the piping bag method and having your garnishes ready to go.

    A platter of finished deviled eggs topped with red paprika as garnish.

    Serving Tips

    To keep deviled eggs from sliding around, use a deviled egg plate with wells for each egg half. No egg plate? Spread a thin layer of soft flat lettuce leaves or finely shredded green cabbage over a serving platter, then nestle the eggs on top. The cabbage works especially well because it adds fresh color, keeps the eggs steady, and makes a pretty party presentation.

    Serve deviled eggs well chilled. They can sit out at room temperature safely for up to 2 hours, or 1 hour if the temperature is 90°F or higher. For outdoor parties or hot-weather serving, place the platter over a tray of crushed ice, or use a chilled serving platter or freezable mat to help keep them cold.

    More Appetizer Recipes

    There are so many marvelous ways to create delicious appetizers, whether for a get-together, a holiday celebration, or watching your favorites games with the gang. Check out some of these recipes and more on the appetizer index page.

    • A white bowl of roasted red pepper hummus to serve as an appetizer.
      Roasted Red Bell Pepper Hummus Recipe
    • Closeup of mushroom pate in a white ramekin with a spoon.
      Classic French Mushroom Duxelle
    • Creamy salmon dip on an appetizer tray with crackers and cucumber chips.
      The Best Smoked Salmon Dip Recipe

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    Let me know if you made these deviled eggs by adding a comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Deviled eggs with paprika | afoodcentriclife.com

    Best Deviled Eggs Recipe

    Sally Cameron
    Buy eggs that are free of cracks. Eggs can be hardboiled and peeled and the filling made a day or two ahead. This recipe halves easily. See notes for using a piping bag and garnishes at the end.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Chilling Time 30 minutes mins
    Total Time 50 minutes mins
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Servings 12
    Calories 154 kcal

    Equipment

    • Food Processor
    • Disposable piping bag with large tip optional

    Ingredients
      

    Deviled Eggs

    • 2 tablespoons white vinegar for the water
    • ½ teaspoon salt for the water
    • 12 large eggs
    • ⅓ - ⅔ cup mayonnaise
    • 1-2 tablespoons creamy Dijon mustard
    • 1 tablespoon prepared horseradish
    • 1-2 teaspoons apple cider vinegar
    • ¼ teaspoon sea salt
    • ⅛ teaspoon white pepper
    • ½ teaspoon dry mustard powder optional for thicker filing if needed

    Optional Garnishes

    • See list in notes below

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    How to Hard Boil Eggs

    • Choose a pot large enough to hold eggs a single layer. Fill the pot about half full with cold water to cover eggs by 2". Add salt and vinegar. Bring the pot to a boil. Turn the heat down to a simmer (small bubbles) and carefully lower eggs into the water. Using a mesh skimmer or a slotted spoon makes it easy. Set timer for 15 minutes.
    • Prepare an ice bath to chill the eggs immediately after cooking by filling a large bowl with ice and cold water. When eggs are done cooking, plunge cooked eggs into the ice bath. Chill until very cold, about 30 minutes. Peel right away or refrigerate them for a day or two until ready to use.

    Make the Filling: Food Processor or Not

    • With a sharp knife, cut eggs in half lengthwise. Pop yolks out and place in the bowl of a food processor or a large bowl. Add ⅓ cup of the mayo, Dijon, horseradish, vinegar, salt and pepper and pulse until smooth and creamy. Depending on how thick you want the filling, adjust with more mayo.
      If you don't have a food processor, place the yolks in a large bowl and mash them into a fine crumble with a fork or push them through a fine sieve with a flexible spatula, then add the mayo, Dijon, horseradish, vinegar, salt and pepper. Stir until creamy.
      Note - if the filling gets too thin, add the dry mustard and blend in. It will help to thicken.

    Filling Deviled Eggs: Two Ways

    • Two ways to fill: spoon or piping bag. Fill the deviled eggs with a spoonful of the filling or use a disposable piping bag for a nice presentation. Piping bag and garnish notes are below.

    Notes

    Piping Bag Notes

    Place filling into a disposable piping bag fitted with a large star or plain tip and pipe into egg halves. If this sounds fussy it's not! It is actually fun and your deviled eggs look so professional. Once you try it you'll be hooked. 

    Ways to Garnish Deviled Eggs

    Use chopped fresh dill, cilantro, or parsley, chopped green onion, regular or smoked paprika, tiny cooked bay shrimp, avocado, sun-dried tomatoes, crisp chopped bacon, sliced jalapeños, black or green olives, capers, radish slices, pickle relish, or half of a small cherry tomato. You choose!

    Nutrition

    Calories: 154kcalCarbohydrates: 2gProtein: 6gFat: 13gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 1gCholesterol: 186mgSodium: 306mgPotassium: 76mgFiber: 1gSugar: 1gVitamin A: 271IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 30mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Red Potato Salad Recipe (No Mayo)

    06/18/2026 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    A bowl of red potato salad with a creamy dressing and a serving spoon.

    This red potato salad recipe is fresh, flavorful, and perfect for summer. Tender skin-on red potatoes are steamed, then tossed with capers, celery, shallot, fresh herbs, and a creamy lemon Dijon vinaigrette. It's a no-mayo potato salad that's light, tangy, easy to make ahead, and perfect for barbecues, picnics, potlucks, and summer dinners.

    A white bowl of red potato salad with herbs, dressing pitcher, and a serving spoon.

    I've been making this red potato salad without mayo for years. Steaming the potatoes helps preserve their flavorful red skins and keeps them from becoming waterlogged, while the Dijon vinaigrette adds creamy texture and bright flavor without mayonnaise. Cook the potatoes ahead, then finish and dress the salad when you're ready to serve.

    Red Potato Salad Recipe Snapshot

    • No mayo - Unlike traditional potato salad, this red skin potato salad skips the mayo.
    • Fresh and tangy - Capers, herbs, lemon, celery, and shallot add bright flavor.
    • Skin-on potatoes - Red skins add color, texture, and flavor.
    • Steamed, not boiled - Better texture, less waterlogged.
    • Make-ahead friendly - Cook the potatoes ahead and dress before serving.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for red potato salad in prep bowls on a counter.
    • Red potatoes - Baby red potatoes are best, and there's no need to peel them. The thin tender skins add color, texture, and nutrients.
    • Celery - Adds fresh crunch.
    • Shallot - Milder and sweeter than onion, or use red or white onion.
    • Herbs - Use a mix of fresh herbs such as dill, parsley, chives, and tarragon.
    • Capers - Adds a salty, tangy pop.
    • Mustard - Smooth Dijon gives the vinaigrette creamy texture and sharp flavor.
    • Oil - Extra virgin olive oil makes the dressing rich and smooth.
    • Lemon juice - Adds brightness and balances the potatoes.
    • Garlic - Adds savory depth to the vinaigrette.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt, and pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • No baby red potatoes - Use larger red potatoes and cut them into bite-sized pieces.
    • No red potatoes - Use baby gold potatoes or small yellow potatoes.
    • Whole grain mustard - Replace the smooth Dijon with whole grain mustard for extra texture (or use both).
    • Add feta - Crumbled feta adds salty, creamy contrast.
    • Add eggs - Chopped hard-boiled eggs make the salad heartier.
    • Swap the capers - Use chopped cornichons instead of capers for a briny crunch.

    Chef's Tip - Steaming vs. Boiling Potatoes and Dressing
    Steaming keeps red potatoes from getting waterlogged, so they hold their shape and taste more flavorful. They cook through without absorbing excess water and are less likely to become mushy. Steaming skin-on potatoes also helps preserve more of the nutrients found in the skins, including fiber and certain vitamins that can leach into cooking water.

    If you love potato salad, here's another one I make often in summer, my French Potato Salad with a light, creamy, mayo-based dressing.

    How to Make Red Potato Salad

    a steamer basket filled with baby red potatoes on the stovetop.
    1. Steam potatoes until easily pierced with a thin skewer or tip of a paring knife.
    Small red potatoes cooling on a white sheet tray.
    1. Cool the potatoes.
    Quartered, cooked red potatoes in a glass bowl.
    1. Quarter the potatoes into bite-sized pieces.
    Red potato salad with celery, capers, herbs, and shallot in a glass bowl.
    1. Add the celery , shallot, and capers.
    A bight golden yellow creamy vinaigrette in a jar.
    1. Make the vinaigrette.
    Dressing added to a red potato salad with celery, herbs, and capers.
    1. Add vinaigrette and sprinkle with herbs and toss again.

    Chef's Tip: Add the fresh herbs after dressing the potatoes and tossing the salad. This keeps the herbs bright, fresh, and vibrant instead of getting weighed down by the vinaigrette. It's a simple step that improves both the flavor and presentation of the salad

    For an easy warm red potato side dish, make these air fryer red potatoes.

    A bowl of red potato salad with a creamy dressing and a serving spoon.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve red potato salad with lemon grilled chicken breasts or roast spatchcock chicken, smoked pork like baby back ribs or pork tenderloin, burgers, steak, salmon, or simple sandwiches. It's a terrific side dish for barbecues, picnics, potlucks, and easy summer dinners.

    For a finishing tip, if you want it more moist, drizzle with a little extra olive oil or more of the dressing.

    It also pairs well with grilled vegetables, corn on the cob, green salad, or recipes from the grill.

    Storage

    Store red potato salad in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. For the freshest flavor and texture, add the herbs just before serving if making it ahead.

    If the salad seems a little dry after chilling, toss with a spoonful or two of extra Dijon vinaigrette or olive oil before serving. Potato salad is not a good dish for freezing as the potatoes become watery and grainy after thawing.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make red potato salad ahead of time?

    Yes. Cook the potatoes up to a day ahead and refrigerate them. Toss with the vinaigrette, herbs, and remaining ingredients before serving, or make the entire salad a day ahead. If needed, refresh it with a little extra vinaigrette or olive oil before serving.

    Why are red potatoes best for potato salad?

    Red potatoes have thin skins and a waxy texture, so they hold their shape well after cooking without becoming mushy. There's no need to peel them, making prep faster.

    Should I boil or steam potatoes for potato salad?

    I prefer steaming. Steaming keeps the potatoes from becoming waterlogged, helps them hold their shape, and preserves more of their natural flavor.

    Can I freeze potato salad?

    No. Freezing changes the texture of the potatoes, making them watery and grainy once thawed.

    More Summer Side Dish Recipes

    For more summer side dish recipes check out the Best of Summer recipe index.

    • A gray pot of savory sweet dark brown baked beans with a wooden spoon.
      Old Fashioned Boston Baked Beans
    • White shallow bowl stilled with green cabbage coleslaw, carrots, and parsley with a light dressing.
      Easy Coleslaw Recipe and Dressing
    • Closeup of corn succotash with red and green peppers and bacon.
      Sweet Corn Succotash with Bacon
    • Mediterranean potato salad
      French Potato Salad

    📖 Recipe

    A bowl of red potato salad with a creamy dressing and a serving spoon.

    Red Potato Salad (No Mayo)

    Sally Cameron
    Fresh, tangy red potato salad made with skin-on steamed red potatoes, herbs, capers, celery, shallot, and a creamy Dijon vinaigrette. No mayo, easy to make ahead, and perfect for summer meals.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 20 minutes mins
    Cooling time 20 minutes mins
    Total Time 55 minutes mins
    Course Salad, Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Servings 6
    Calories 169 kcal

    Equipment

    • Large pot, 5-6 quarts with lid
    • Folding steamer basket that opens wide and flat so potatoes are in a mostly single layer

    Ingredients
      

    Potato Salad

    • 1 pound baby red potatoes
    • ⅓ cup finely chopped celery
    • 2 tablespoons finely chopped shallot red onion, or white onion
    • 2 tablespoons capers rinsed and drined
    • 2 tablespoons chopped mixed herbs of choice tarragon, parsley, dill, chives

    Dressing (makes ½ cup)

    • ⅓ cup extra virgin olive oil
    • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
    • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
    • 1 large garlic clove microplaned or chopped fine
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ - 1 teaspoon mild honey or similar sweetener
    • ¼ teaspoon pepper

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Set up the steamer

    • Fill a pot with a few inches of water and insert a steamer basket.

    Steam potatoes

    • Add the potatoes, cover, and steam until tender, about 18-25 minutes, depending on size. A paring knife or thin metal skewer should slide in easily.

    Cool potatoes

    • Remove the steamer basket from the pot and allow potatoes to cool on a sheet tray. When cool enough to handle, quarter the potatoes into bite-sized pieces.

    Make the dressing

    • Add all ingredients to a small blender and blend creamy. Alternatively add to a tight lidded jar and shake well, or whisk smooth in small bowl.

    Dressing potatoes

    • Before serving, add the celery, shallot, and capers. Toss with 3-4 tablespoons of dressing to start, then taste and add more dressing, salt, and freshly ground pepper if desired. Add the fresh herbs last and toss gently so they stay bright and fresh.

    Notes

    Potatoes can be steamed and chilled the day before serving to save time.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 169kcalCarbohydrates: 14gProtein: 2gFat: 12gSaturated Fat: 2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 9gSodium: 314mgPotassium: 386mgFiber: 2gSugar: 2gVitamin A: 37IUVitamin C: 10mgCalcium: 16mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Flank Steak Marinade

    06/11/2026 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    Partially sliced flank steak with perfect grill marks on a brown wood board.

    A great flank steak marinade should do two things: add flavor and help tenderize the meat. This easy marinade creates a balanced blend of savory, tangy, and slightly sweet flavors that make flank steak juicy and delicious on the grill. It's simple to make with a handful of pantry ingredients and perfect for weeknight dinners, cookouts, and summer entertaining.

    A sliced flank steak on a wooden board with perfect grill marks and running juices.

    This marinade for flank steak gets its flavor from balsamic vinegar, tamari, Worcestershire sauce, Dijon mustard, garlic, and fresh herbs. Dijon helps the marinade cling to the steak, tamari adds umami, balsamic brings gentle sweetness and tang, and garlic and herbs add depth. Simple ingredients, big flavor.

    Need a quick overview? Use the AI tools below to summarize, save, or ask questions about this recipe.

    ChatGPT
    Google AI
    Claude
    Perplexity
    Add us as a Google Trusted Source

    Flank Steak Marinade Recipe Snapshot

    • Flavorful, juicy steak - Adds savory, tangy flavor to lean flank steak.
    • Easy pantry ingredients - Made with balsamic vinegar, tamari, Dijon, garlic, and herbs.
    • Perfect for grilling - Great for cookouts, BBQs, and weeknight dinners.
    • Make-ahead friendly - Mix in minutes, then let the refrigerator and the grill do the work.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Ingredients for grilled steak and flank steak marinade on a counter.
    • Oil - Extra virgin olive oil adds richness; avocado oil works too.
    • Balsamic vinegar - Adds sweetness, acidity, and depth to the marinade.
    • Soy sauce or tamari - Use low-sodium soy sauce, or tamari for gluten-free.
    • Worcestershire sauce - Adds savory depth and classic steakhouse flavor.
    • Dijon mustard - Helps the marinade emulsify and cling to the steak.
    • Garlic - Fresh garlic cloves give the best flavor.
    • Herbs - Fresh thyme or rosemary both work well. Use dried herbs if needed.
    • Red pepper flakes - Optional, for a little kick.
    • Steak - I buy flank steak but this marinade works with other cuts as well, see below.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Vinegar - Fig balsamic is terrific here, and red wine vinegar works too for a sharper, less sweet marinade.
    • Soy-free option - Use soy-free tamari if needed. Coconut aminos should work, though I have not tested this marinade with it.
    • Other cuts of beef - This marinade also works with skirt steak, flat iron steak, flap steak, hanger steak, or sirloin. Slice thinly across the grain for the best texture.
    • Make beef kabobs - Use top sirloin for flavorful, tender kabobs. Cut into even 1½-inch cubes and marinate 2-4 hours before skewering and grilling.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, and pepper. No salt is needed.

    How to Make Flank Steak Marinade

    Ingredients for flank steak marinade in a glass jar.
    1. Add all of the ingredients to a blender and blend smooth, or shake well in a tight-lidded jar.
    Creamy blended steak marinade for flank steak.
    1. The Dijon makes a creamy emulsion when you use a blender and helps the marinade cling to the steak.
    A flank steak in a white casserole dish with a meat fork.
    1. With a meat fork, pierce holes in the flank steak for marinade access and to tenderize.
    Steak marinating in a white rectangular casserole dish.
    1. Cover both sides of the steak well with about ½ of the marinade. Refrigerate for 2-3 hours or up to 8 hours, removing from the refrigerator the last 45-60 minutes.
    Flank steak on grill grates with perfect crosshatch grill marks.
    1. Wipe off excess marinade and grill on hot, clean grill grates, 10-11 minutes in total. I spray the meat lightly with avocado oil to help it release from the grill.
    Slicing flank steak thinly across the grain pn a black cutting board.
    1. Allow the flank steak to rest for 10 minutes, then slice thinly across the grain for tender meat.
    Partially sliced flank steak with perfect grill marks on a brown wood board.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve sliced flank steak with:

    • Red potato salad.
    • Side green salad or make a steak salad.
    • Grilled vegetables.
    • Rice, quinoa, or cheesy cauliflower rice.
    • In tortillas for tacos with avocado, salsa, and slaw.
    • Bowls with greens, vegetables, and a drizzle of extra clean marinade.
    • Sandwiches or lettuce wraps.
    • Eggs the next morning, if you have leftovers.

    For a serving sauce, try my Argentinian chimichurri sauce, or use the recipe and swap out the oregano for tarragon and the onion for shallot for a more French-style herb sauce.

    More Marinade Recipes

    Try these marinade to infuse flavor, help keep proteins moist during high-heat cooking like grilling, and tenderize tougher cuts of meat. And extra, clean most marinades make a great sauce for serving.

    • Sliced flank steak on a cutting board with flank steak marinade in a small bowl.
      Carne Asada Marinade (for Grilled Steak)
    • Platter of grilled chicken breasts with herbs.
      Easy Blender Lemon Chicken Marinade
    • Bright red orange Buffalo grilled chicken breasts on a gray platter with a serving fork.
      Grilled Buffalo Chicken
    • A jar of salsa chimichurri of parsley, oregano, olive oil, onion, and vinegar.
      Argentinian Chimichurri Sauce (salsa chimichurri)

    📖 Recipe

    Partially sliced flank steak with perfect grill marks on a brown wood board.

    Flank Steak Marinade

    Sally Cameron
    This grilled flank steak is marinated for big flavor, quickly cooked over high heat, then rested and sliced thinly across the grain for tender, juicy results. It's an easy summer dinner for salads, tacos, bowls, or meal prep.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 8 minutes mins
    Cook Time 11 minutes mins
    Marinating time 2 hours hrs
    Total Time 1 hour hr 19 minutes mins
    Course Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Servings 4
    Calories 539 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    Flank steak marinade (makes 1 cup)

    • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
    • ¼ cup balsamic vinegar regular or fig balsamic
    • 2 tablespoons low sodium tamari (GF) or soy sauce
    • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire
    • 1 tablespoon Dijon
    • 3 garlic cloves
    • 1 teaspoon fresh chopped thyme or rosemary
    • ½ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1 pinch red pepper flakes optional

    Steak

    • 1 ¾-2 pounds flank steak

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Make the marinadae

    • Add the marinade ingredients to a jar with a tight-fitting lid and shake until smooth, or blend briefly to emulsify.

    Marinate the steak

    • Place the flank steak in a rectangular casserole dish or similar shallow dish. Pierce the steak all over with a meat fork to help tenderize and allow the marinade to penetrate a little more. Pour half of the marinade over the steak and turn to coat both sides. Cover and refrigerate for 2-3 hours, or up to 8 hours.
      About 45–60 minutes before grilling, remove the steak from the refrigerator to take off the chill.

    Grill the steak

    • Heat the grill to high and make sure the grates are clean and oiled. Remove the steak from the marinade and pat off the excess so it grills instead of steams.
      Place the steak on the grill with one end pointing toward 2 o’clock. Grill 4 minutes. Rotate the steak to 10 o’clock and grill 4 minutes more. Turn the steak over and grill another 2–3 minutes, or until done to your preference.

    Rest and slice

    • Transfer the steak to a clean platter or sheet pan. Brush with some of the reserved clean marinade, if desired. Rest for 10 minutes, then slice thinly across the grain. Serve with extra reserved marinade as a sauce if desired.

    Notes

    For yield and serving purposes, flank steak loses approximately 25% of its weight during grilling. A 2-pound flank steak yields about 1½ pounds cooked steak, or four 6-ounce servings. Buy 2 2- pound flanks steaks for bigger families or leftover as it's easy to grill two at once. 
    Fresh, unused marinade untouched by raw meat will last 3-5 days in the refrigerator because of the raw garlic. Do not use it beyond that for food safety.
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 539kcalCarbohydrates: 5gProtein: 44gFat: 37gSaturated Fat: 8gPolyunsaturated Fat: 3gMonounsaturated Fat: 24gCholesterol: 119mgSodium: 495mgPotassium: 776mgFiber: 0.3gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 16IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 61mgIron: 4mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Beet Juice Recipe

    05/22/2018 by Sally Cameron 4 Comments

    glass of deep ruby red beet juice with vegetables behind.

    Juicing is one of the most powerful ways to boost your daily nutrition-and this beet juice recipe is a favorite in our kitchen. With vibrant color and bold, earthy-sweet flavor, it's a delicious way to support energy, skin health, and overall wellness. We make this blend every week, and once you try it, you just might do the same.

    ruby root beet juice | afoodcentriclife.com

    This intensely-colored juice gets its deep red color from red beets and from betacyanin, the phytonutrient responsible for that color. This juicing recipe includes carrots, celery, ginger, lemon and tart Granny Smith apple, each with great health benefits, and not to mention it tastes great too!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Love This Recipe

    • Nutrient-packed - Loaded with antioxidants, vitamins, and minerals to support energy, detox, and glowing skin.
    • Fresh and flavorful - A balanced blend of earthy, sweet, and tangy ingredients.
    • Beautiful and easy - Naturally vibrant in color and simple to make at home with a juicer.

    Beets are so good for you! Another way to enjoy them is this beautiful beet and feta salad.

    Recipe Ingredients

    For juicing, buy only organic produce for the lowest pesticide residues. You want your juices as healthy as possible. And be sure to wash your produce well. If organic is not available where you are, shop by the dirty dozen and clean fifteen list.

    • Celery - Hydrating and mineral-rich, celery helps reduce inflammation and supports digestion.
    • Carrots - Naturally sweet and full of beta-carotene, carrots promote eye and skin health.
    • Beet - Earthy and vibrant, beets are loaded with antioxidants and support circulation and detox.
    • Lemon - Adds bright flavor and vitamin C to boost immunity and balance the sweetness.
    • Green Apple - Tart and crisp, it adds a touch of natural sweetness without spiking sugar.
    • Ginger Root - Adds a subtle kick and is known for its anti-inflammatory and digestive benefits.

    Substitutions & Variations

    • Swap the apple - Use a pear for a slightly milder sweetness, or a red apple if you prefer it sweeter overall.
    • No fresh ginger? - Add a pinch of ground ginger.
    • Milder beet flavor - Use just half a beet or add more carrot to soften the earthiness. Golden beets are also milder and slightly sweeter.
    • Spice it up - A dash of cayenne can boost metabolism and add a warming kick.
    • Make it smoother - Strain the juice after blending for a cleaner finish.
    • No juicer? - Blend everything with a little water, then strain through a fine mesh sieve or nut milk bag.

    How to Make Beet Juice

    Wash all of your produce well. No need to peel anything. Cut vegetables and fruit into bite-sized pieces for juicing with your specific juicer according to the manufacturer's directions. Process everything into beet juice.

    Beet Juice Health Benefits

    Beets are a powerful natural detoxifier, and that makes your liver happy because your liver is your main detox organ. Here are some powerful health benefits of beets and beet juice:

    • Beet juice assists in lowering blood pressure due to natural nitrate content, especially in raw beets.
    • Beets support the fight against cancer, support eye health and lower the risk for heart disease.
    • And if you are an athlete, studies suggest beets improve performance.

    And those natural beet nitrates? They may improve mental and cognitive function by promoting the dilation of blood vessels and thus increasing blood flow to the brain. Read more about the huge health benefits of beets here. And if your urine or poop turn a bit pink or red, don't worry; that's natural. It's a harmless, temporary condition called beeturia.

    ruby root beet juice | afoodcentriclife.com

    More Juicing Recipes

    Check out this post for more information the best healthy juice when juicing with vegetables.

    • Glasses of bright green, healthy cucumber, celery vegetables juice.
      Cucumber Celery Juice
    • A glass of bright green cabbage juice on a brown cutting board with vegetable bowl behind.
      Cabbage Juice
    • watermelon cucumber juice
      Watermelon Cucumber Juice
    • carrot celery morning glow juice
      Carrot Ginger Juice Recipe

    Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this beet juice recipe, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. They really help other readers. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating!

    📖 Recipe

    ruby root beet juice | afoodcentriclife.com

    Beet Juice Recipe

    Sally Cameron
    When buying produce for juicing, go organic. Variance in quantities is listed as it depends on the size of, for example, beets, which can be small or huge. Scrub or soak produce prior to juicing, but do not peel.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 10 minutes mins
    Course Drinks, Juices
    Cuisine American
    Servings 2 Yield 1 quart
    Calories 201 kcal

    Equipment

    • an electric juicer

    Ingredients
      

    • 8 ribs celery
    • 8 carrots
    • 1 medium beet
    • 1 large lemon
    • ½ Granny Smith apple cored
    • 1 inch raw ginger root

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Chop produce into the appropriate size for your juicer, then juice according to the manufacturers directions. Strain if desired.

    Notes

    If your beets come with the beet greens attached, you can juice those as well, but the color may be a bit muddied because green and red mixed together make brown. Still full of nutrition. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 201kcalCarbohydrates: 48gProtein: 6gFat: 1gSaturated Fat: 0.2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.1gSodium: 365mgPotassium: 1611mgFiber: 14gSugar: 26gVitamin A: 41546IUVitamin C: 54mgCalcium: 175mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Refreshing Cucumber Smoothie Recipe

    07/17/2024 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    Creamy light green cucumber mint smoothie in a glass with lime slice.

    Cucumber in a smoothie? It's not crazy, it's crazy good! It's technically a fruit, so why not? This cucumber smoothie is refreshing and nutritious, perfect for the hot days of summer. Let me show you how to make a healthy high-protein cucumber smoothie. Cucumbers are for more than salads, salsas, and pickles. They are for smoothies too!

    Minty green cucumber smoothie in a glass with mint leaves, cucumber slices, lime slice, and green striped straw.

    I'd never made a fresh cucumber smoothie until I started growing cucumbers. Looking for creative ways to use my bounty (besides sharing them with my neighbors), I started making cucumber smoothies. I was amazed how delicious they are! If you enjoy smoothies, try this one for a change-up to your morning routine. It's delicious, and as with all smoothies, there are many ways to customize them.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • It's a refreshing, healthy, summertime smoothie.
    • Another great way to get nutritious cucumbers into your diet.
    • Customize to get to the grams of protein you need.

    For another refreshing way to use cucumbers, try this cucumber and feta salad with mint. The mint really makes it.

    Cucumber Smoothie Ingredients

    • Cucumber: Use an English cucumber (aka hot house cucumber), persian cucumbers, or mini cucumbers for a cucumber smoothie. Pass on regular cucumbers with nubby skins as they usually have a wax coating, lot of seeds, and are sometimes bitter. One English cucumber is enough for two smoothies.
    • Milk: Almond milk and hemp seed milk are my go-to's for smoothies. Use what works best for you, whether dairy milk or plant-based milk.
    • Citrus: Fresh lime juice lifts the flavor, or use lemon juice. 
    • Yogurt: Use plain Greek yogurt as it's thicker, higher in protein than regular yogurt, and helps provide a creamy texture.
    • Protein powder: Use your favorite or use more yogurt to get your protein. Here is the protein powder we use.
    • Spinach: Fresh spinach leaves add nutrition and color. Grab a container of baby spinach leaves and get your leafy greens!
    • Honey: To sweeten just a touch and offset the tangy yogurt. I use no-sugar monk fruit honey.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    Be sure to check out my Guide to Making Healthy Smoothies.

    Chef Sally's Cucumber tips: Why use the seedless or slicing cucumbers? Because they don't have a bitter compound called cucurbitacin. They also have a higher natural sugar content makes them sweeter and a thin skin. Even though they are called "seedless", there are still tiny seeds but they are easy to eat. Lastly, that bitter compound is why some people experience burping or digestive upset with cucumbers.

    For another cool and refreshing recipe with cucumbers, try this chilled tomato gazpacho soup. It's like a summer garden in a bowl.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Milk alternatives: Try coconut water, oat milk, coconut milk, hemp seed milk, or pumpkin seed milk, cashew milk, or organic soy milk.
    • Fresh herbs: Add a few fresh mint leaves. If you don't grow it, it's easy to grow and have available for recipes. Another good addition is fresh cilantro.
    • Add some frozen banana for more creaminess.
    • If you don't want to use protein powder, use more plain Greek yogurt.
    • Add a quarter of an avocado for more creamy smoothness and healthy fat.
    • Add a tablespoon or two of chia seeds or hemp seeds for more protein, healthy fats, protein, and fiber.
    • For a dairy-free smoothie, skip the yogurt and use an all plant-based protein blend, and add seeds, or use a non-dairy yogurt.

    For another creamy green smoothie, try my green detox smoothie.

    Chef Sally says: If you're looking to build and maintain muscle (especially important as we age), another terrific addition is creatine powder. Here is the brand of creatine we use. Learn more by reading this super informative article on what it is and the benefits, and here is a another good read. It's not just for body builders. In short, it's an amino acid essential for muscle health.

    How to Make a Cucumber Smoothie

    Prep-Step: Freezing Cucumbers

    There are two options for prepping the cucumber: slice out the seedy center or don't. I do, so the cucumber pieces are meatier. If you prefer to use your cucumber seeds and all, that's fine. For the smoothie, you need a cup of frozen cucumber pieces.

    Chopping cucumbers on a white cutting board.
    Step 1: Chop cucumber into bite-sized pieces, slicing out the seedy centers.
    Chopped cucumbers on a silver gray rimmed baking sheet.
    Step 2: Place chopped cucumber on a sheet tray and freeze until solid, then place in a zip bag.

    Make the Smoothie

    Ingredients for a cucumber smoothie in a blender container ready to blend.
    Step 3: Add the base liquid to a high speed blender first, then all other ingredients
    A blended green cucumber smoothie
    Step 4: Start low and blend on high until smooth.

    Chef Sally says: Once you've added the cucumbers to the blender, put them back in the freezer right away as they thaw fast. They are like cucumber ice cubes because cucumber is mostly water.

    After those cucumbers are frozen, another good combination is cucumber and pineapple, as in this mango pineapple smoothie. Swap it for the mango.

    Serving Suggestions

    Blend and enjoy cold! It's refreshing and so good. Adjust the protein level to your personal needs. To make a cucumber smoothie ahead of time, blend the smoothie in advance and store it in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours. I've done this and it tastes great the next day. It will separate because of the high water content of cucumbers, just stir, shake or whisk together and enjoy.

    Another option, add all of the ingredients to a large container and refrigerate, then dump and blend in the morning.

    Creamy green smoothie with cucumber, mint, lime, and yogurt in a glass with a green striped straw.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I use any type of cucumber for a smoothie?

    Yes, you can use any type of cucumber, but English cucumbers or seedless cucumbers are preferred because they have fewer seeds and thinner skin, which makes for a smoother texture. Additionally you can slice out the cucumber seeds.

    Should I peel the cucumber first?

    No, do not peel the cucumber for a smoothie. There is lots of nutrition in that lovely dark green skin. This is why it's best to use an English or seedless cucumber as the skins are thinner and blend easier. Peel them if they have a waxy coating.

    How can I make my cucumber smoothie thicker?

    To make the smoothie thicker, you can add ingredients like Greek yogurt, avocado, banana, or chia seeds. These will also add extra nutrition to your smoothie. A few ice cubes helps too.

    Are cucumbers good for me?

    Cucumbers offer many nutritional benefits. Because they have a high water content, cucumbers  are hydrating, low in calories, and rich in vitamin C & K. Cucumbers provide minerals such as potassium and magnesium, and are positive for digestive health. 

    More Super Smoothie Recipes

    I drink smoothies year round and am always coming up with new recipes. Try a few of my other smoothies recipes to change up your smoothie game.

    • Top down shot of a deep pink cherry smoothie in a tall glass with banana and a cherry.
      5-Minute Cherry Smoothie Recipe
    • A bright pink berry smoothie with fresh raspberries inside the glass.
      Raspberry Smoothie (High Protein & Easy)
    • two chocolate smoothies in glasses on an antique tray.
      Chocolate Banana Smoothie
    • Creamy orange pumpkin pie smoothie in a glass with a silver straw.
      Pumpkin Smoothie (Healthy & Easy)

    ⭐️Did You Make This?

    If you make a cucumber smoothie, I hope you'll comment and let me know how you liked it. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers and I appreciate hearing from you.

    📖 Recipe

    Creamy light green cucumber mint smoothie in a glass with lime slice.

    Cucumber smoothie

    Sally Cameron
    Creamy and refreshing, this cucumber smoothie is a welcome summer breakfast, snack, or post-workout refuel. Adjust the protein level to your specific needs.
    No ratings yet
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Freezing cucumber 3 hours hrs
    Total Time 3 hours hrs 5 minutes mins
    Course Beverage, Breakfast, smoothie
    Cuisine American
    Servings 1
    Calories 203 kcal

    Equipment

    • High speed blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 10 ounces almond milk or milk of choice
    • ½ scoop protein powder of choice
    • 1 cup frozen cucumber pieces 5 ounces
    • ½ cup plain greek yogurt
    • 1 lime, juiced
    • 1 tablespoon zero-sugar honey or regular honey
    • 1 ounce baby spinach leaves a big handful

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Add the almond milk to the blender container then everything else. Blend until smooth and enjoy!

    Notes

    Order the monk fruit honey on this site. It comes in flavors too! It's all I use. 
    Options: Add a small banana, add chopped mint leaves, swap lemon for lime, use all plain yogurt or all protein powder (but the combination is nice).
    The nutrition calculation is provided as a reference as the numbers may change depending on the brands and ingredients you use or add. I use monk fruit honey so there is no sugar. If you use honey or sweetened yogurt, your sugar/carb numbers will be higher. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 203kcalCarbohydrates: 30gProtein: 26gFat: 5gSaturated Fat: 0.4gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 30mgSodium: 453mgPotassium: 565mgFiber: 4gSugar: 8gVitamin A: 2845IUVitamin C: 30mgCalcium: 567mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Tart Crust (grain-free gluten-free)

    11/24/2013 by Sally Cameron 51 Comments

    Gluten free almond tart crust

    Here is a tart crust recipe that works for your favorite fillings, whether pumpkin, chocolate, or even a savory goat cheese. It's made with simple ingredients, a blend of almond flour, coconut flour, butter and a little sugar. It's naturally gluten-free and grain-free too. Press the tart crust mix into a tart pan with your fingers, bake and fill. No rolling of pastry! Bake it a day ahead of filling to save time. It's so easy.

    A golden almond flour tart crust ready to be filled.

    If you have not made a press-in crust like this, I think you'll love it like I do. No pastry dough to roll out and mess with. It takes about 15 minutes to assemble plus baking time. Combining almond flour and coconut flour for a cookie-like crust makes for a perfect gluten free tart crust. Fill it with my spiced pumpkin tart filling for Thanksgiving, a rich chocolate filling for Christmas, or other holidays and celebrations.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Recipe Ingredients

    • Almond Flour - Naturally gluten-free and rich in healthy fats, almond flour gives the crust a tender, buttery texture.
    • Coconut Flour - Highly absorbent and also gluten-free, coconut flour adds structure and helps the crust hold together without becoming dense.
    • Sugar - Light brown sugar adds a subtle caramel flavor.
    • Butter - Use unsalted butter for better control over flavor. Salted butter can throw off the balance.
    • Salt - Fine sea salt enhances the flavor of both the crust and the filling-don't skip it!

    Substitutions and Variations

    • For a vegan tart crust (or dairy-free), use a stick form (not in a tub) plant-based butter such as this.
    • For a savory tart crust: If you want to make a savory (not sweet) crust, please read my post for the cherry tomato tart with fresh basil leaves and the crust adjustments. I eliminated the sugar, added an egg yolk.
    Almond Coconut Crust|AFoodCentricLife.com

    Recipe Tools

    • 9 ½″ light metal tart pan with a removable bottom.
    • Half-sheet rimmed baking sheets. They have a raised edge, not flat like a cookie sheet (13″x 18″.) Buy them online from Amazon. Make sure they are heavy, not cheap. Heavy duty ones stand up to use without warping. Cheap ones warp. There are other brands too, just be sure they are heavy duty.
    • A silicone liner is on the baking sheet. It prevents the tart crust from sliding around as well as protects it from the direct heat of the oven. Find Silpat on Amazon and cooking supply stores.

    Recipe Instructions

    Almond flour and coconut flour in a bowl with a fork for mixing.

    Step 1: in a medium mixing bowl, mix the dry ingredients (flours) and sugar together with a fork.

    Testing cookie crust tart dough by squeezing in your hand.

    Step 2: Add in the melted butter and mix with a fork. When the mix looks evenly combined, squeeze a handful together. It should hold, like in the photo. The crust mix should feel moist. If not add a little more melted butter.

    Forming a gluten free tart crust by hand in a tart pan.

    Step 3: Create the tart shell, fuss a bit and take your time. It take about 12 minutes to assemble. 

    The time you take to make the crust perfect will be worth it. Pour the crust mix into the tart pan, distributing it evenly with your fingers. Work on the crust edge first. You want to create a strong, even edge.

    Push and pinch the crust mix into the edge of the tart pan with your fingers and thumbs. Work to build it up in layers and keep moving around the tart pan. It takes a little time. Keep working it. A nice sturdy edge will give strength to the tart when you cut it. 

    When you have a nice strong edge, pat the rest firmly into the bottom of the tart pan for the base (and don't poke holes). The bottom of a flat glass helps.

    A light g olden baked gluten-free tart shell  made with almond and coconut flour.

    Step 4: Place the tart pan on a sheet pan for support. Blind bake the tart crust util it is golden. Remove from the oven and cool prior to filling.

    Bake the tart crust in a 350° oven for approximately 15-17 minutes. Timing will vary with ovens. You want it to be a light golden brown. Remove and cool. Use with your filling of choice. If you are using my pumpkin filling, you will bake the tart a second time.

    Make Head Tips

    You can bake this easy gluten-free tart crust a day ahead. After baking and cooling, wrap it in the pan (for support) with plastic wrap. It's fine stored on the counter for a day.

    Serving Suggestions

    Here are the tart filling recipes I have created so far, both sweet and savory:

    • Chocolate Hazelnut Tart
    • Spiced Pumpkin Tart
    • Lemon meringue Tart

    Recipe FAQs

    Should I pre-bake (blind bake) the crust?

    After creating your tart crust, blind bake it, which means pre-bake it before filling. THis helps insure that the crust does not get soggy when filled and baked or filled with a no-bake filling.

    Can I make it dairy-free, too?

    Make the tart crust dairy-free or vegan using an unsalted plant-based butter in stick form, not tub form.

    What type of gluten-free flour is best for tart crust?

    Because there are many choices in gluten-free flours, there is not one right answer. For tart crusts, a blend of gluten-free flours is best to get the best attributes of each flour, such as proteins and starches. It also depends on if you're making a roll out pastry style crust or a press-in style crust.

    ⭐️Did You Make This Recipe?

    If you make this tart crust, please comment and let me know how you liked it and how it worked for you. If you loved it, please give it a 5 star rating! They really help other readers and I enjoy hearing from you.

    📖 Recipe

    Fingers forming an almond tart crust and building the edges.

    Gluten free tart crust (grain free too)

    Sally Cameron
    Using almond flour and coconut flour, this tart crust or pie crust is wheat-free and gluten-free. Fill with creamy spiced pumpkin, chocolate or a savory cheese and tomato filling.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Cook Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 30 minutes mins
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Servings 8
    Calories 236 kcal

    Equipment

    • 9 ½" removable bottom tart pan (light colored)
    • Silpat or other non-slip liner optional
    • Half sheet size rimmed baking sheet

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ½ cups almond flour 6 ounces
    • ½ cup coconut flour 2 ounces
    • 2 tablespoons light brown sugar or natural granulated sugar
    • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted or plant-based butter
    • ¼ teaspoon salt

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    Mix Crust

    • Pre-heat oven to 350° (177 C). In a medium bowl, mix almond flour, coconut flour, sugar and melted butter with a fork until blended, then blend until completely combined with your fingers. To test, squeeze a handful together. It should hold together and feel moist.

    Form Crust With Your Fingers

    • Pour the crust mix into the tart pan and distribute it evenly. Start by building the edges of the tart. With your fingers and thumbs, pinch and crimp the crust mix together to form a strong, fairly thick edge. Refer to the photos in the post for guidance. This will take 12-15 minutes. Don't hurry. It will be worth it.
    • Once you've created a strong edge, compress what is left of the crust mix into a firm base in the bottom of the tart pan with your hand or a flat bottom glass. Place the tart pan on a rimmed baking sheet. If you have a silicone liner, place it on the baking sheet first so the tart pan does not slide. If you don't have one, no problem. Just be careful with the unbaked tart crust.

    Bake Crust and Cool

    • Bake tart crust for 14-16 minutes, or until light golden brown. Timing will depend on your ovens. Cool and fill as desired.

    Notes

    I used Bobs Red Mill coconut flour and almond flour for this recipe

    Nutrition

    Calories: 236kcalCarbohydrates: 11gProtein: 6gFat: 20gSaturated Fat: 7gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.3gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.3gCholesterol: 23mgSodium: 96mgPotassium: 3mgFiber: 5gSugar: 3gVitamin A: 262IUCalcium: 47mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Cabbage Juice

    01/19/2021 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    A glass of bright green cabbage juice on a brown cutting board with vegetable bowl behind.

    Ever juice cabbage? This crisp green cabbage juice pairs cabbage with celery for a clean, refreshing flavor and beautiful pale green color. If you enjoy celery juice or green juice, this simple cabbage juice recipe is an easy one to add to your juicing routine. Cabbage is naturally rich in nutrients and makes more than great coleslaw and tacos.

    green cabbage juice | afoodcentriclife.com

    This green cabbage juice became a new go-to almost by accident. One day I was making celery juice and ran short on celery, but had a big head of green cabbage in the refrigerator. I'd never juiced cabbage before, but thought, why not? It turned out crisp, clean, and surprisingly refreshing.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Cabbage Juice Recipe Snapshot

    • Crisp and clean - Green cabbage and celery make a refreshing, vegetable-forward juice.
    • Easy green juice - Just a few simple ingredients and a juicer.
    • Naturally nutrient-rich - Made with fresh cabbage, celery, lemon, and ginger.
    • Surprisingly mild - Cabbage juice tastes cleaner and slightly sweeter than you might expect.
    • Great way to use cabbage - Perfect when you have extra green cabbage beyond coleslaw, tacos, and stir-fries.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Cabbage is a member of the cruciferous vegetable family like kale, broccoli and cauliflower and you know how good these veggies are for you.

    • Cabbage - Use green cabbage for this juice.
    • Celery - Blends nicely with the cabbage, lemon and green apple.
    • Green apple - I buy Granny Smith apples for juicing as they are lower in sugar than other apples with a nice tart flavor.
    • Lemon - Leave the lemon peel on if thinner skinned. There is beneficial limonene in the peel that is not in the lemon juice.
    • Ginger (optional) - A small piece of fresh ginger adds a little zip and warmth to the juice. Start with a small amount and adjust to your taste.

    Please see recipe card for measurements.

    Chef's tip - Be sure to buy organic produce for juicing. If that is not possible be sure to check the EWG's list for the Dirty Dozen and Clean Fifteen for pesticide levels.

    celery juice | afoodcentriclife.com

    How to Make Cabbage Juice

    Wash all of your produce and get it ready to juice when you get home from the market, then you'll get your juice made faster. Simply process according to your brand of juicer manufacturer directions.

    • Cut the cabbage head into quarters, then into smaller chunks if needed for the feed tube of your juicer.
    • Chop off celery leaves as they can taste bitter.
    • Core and seed the apple, then quarter it.

    Chef's tip - Don't Peel Lemons. Some people peel lemons for juicing; I do not. Limonene is a chemical found in the peels of citrus fruits and in other plants that you want to consume. If the lemon has a heavy skin, slice off the ends before juicing.

    The Health Benefits of Cabbage Juice

    Cabbage juice has a long history of being studied for digestive health, especially in relation to peptic ulcers. Older studies looked at raw cabbage juice, sometimes referred to as "vitamin U," and reported promising results for ulcer healing.

    Peptic ulcers are often linked to Helicobacter pylori infection or long-term NSAID use. If you're dealing with ongoing stomach pain, bloating, burning, or digestive symptoms, work with your healthcare provider to understand the cause and appropriate treatment.

    green cabbage celery juice | afoodcentriclife.com

    Serving and Storage

    This recipe makes 2-18 ounce servings or 4 smaller ones. Juice is best consumed right after preparing. I love it at room temperature, right out of the juicer, but see the tip below.

    Chef's Tip: Depending on your juicer brand, you can keep the fresh juice tightly capped in bottles with no air between the cap and juice level for 24-72 hours. If it's a little low, fill with filtered water to top it off. See your juicer brand guidelines. For juicers, I use both the Slowstar and the Greenstar Elite from Tribest. Both models are slow masticating juicers that get the most out of your produce. If you love to juice, these machines are a worthwhile investment.

    More Juice Recipes

    For other ways to get cabbage into your diet, try this broccoli cabbage slaw or braised cabbage and leeks. All delicious.

    • watermelon cucumber juice
      Watermelon Cucumber Juice
    • glass of deep ruby red beet juice with vegetables behind.
      Beet Juice Recipe
    • carrot celery morning glow juice
      Carrot Ginger Juice Recipe
    • Glasses of bright green, healthy cucumber, celery vegetables juice.
      Cucumber Celery Juice

    If You Make Cabbage Juice

    If you make this, please add your comment. I love hearing from you and other readers learn from your comments. Thanks for supporting my site.

    📖 Recipe

    A glass of bright green cabbage juice on a brown cutting board with vegetable bowl behind.

    Cabbage Juice

    Sally Cameron
    Not just for coleslaw and sauerkraut, cabbage is delightful and healing when juiced with celery, green apple and lemon. It's light, refreshing and tastes delicious.
    5 from 4 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 10 minutes mins
    Course Beverage, Juice
    Cuisine American
    Servings 2 18-ounce juices
    Calories 222 kcal

    Equipment

    • Juicer

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 large head green cabbage approximately 1 pound
    • 1-2 heads celery 1 ½ pounds
    • 1 green apple cored and seeded
    • 1 small lemon or ½ a larger lemon
    • 1 small knob of ginger optional, peeled

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • After washing all produce, chop into pieces that fit through your juicer's feed tube. Cut the lemon small and discard seeds. Process vegetables through your juicer according to the manufacturers directions for your particular juicer.
      It's best enjoyed right away but may last refrigerated for up to 72 hours. See your juicer's guidelines.

    Notes

    It's best to buy organic for juicing, especially as celery usually shows up on the Dirty Dozen list for high pesticides. Cabbage is usually way down the list but I still recommend organic if possible.
    Nutrition information is estimated and will vary based on the juicer used and how much pulp is removed during juicing.
    Depending on your juicer brand, you can keep the fresh juice tightly capped in bottles with no air between the cap and juice level for 24-72 hours. If it's a little low, fill with filtered water to top it off. See your juicer brand guidelines.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 222kcalCarbohydrates: 54gProtein: 9gFat: 1gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 1gSodium: 130mgPotassium: 1285mgSugar: 31gVitamin A: 762IUVitamin C: 262mgCalcium: 277mgIron: 3mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Cucumber Celery Juice

    01/19/2021 by Sally Cameron 3 Comments

    Glasses of bright green, healthy cucumber, celery vegetables juice.

    Crisp, clean, and refreshing sounds like an iced tea commercial, but I'm talking about cucumber celery juice. If you love green juice, this simple recipe is a terrific one to add to your juicing routine. It's hydrating and packed with vitamins, minerals, and naturally occurring electrolytes from fresh vegetables. Get more greens into your day with this bright, refreshing celery cucumber juice.

    A vibrant green juices in glass with with cucumber, lemon and celery.

    This cucumber celery juice is more than refreshing. Celery, cucumber, lemon, and fennel are naturally rich in phytonutrients and antioxidants, making this a bright, vegetable-forward juice with anti-inflammatory benefits. It's light, crisp, and a beautiful way to add more fresh produce to your day.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Cucumber Celery Juice Recipe Snapshot

    • Immune-supporting nutrients - Made with vegetables rich in vitamins C, A, and K, plus minerals such as potassium and calcium.
    • Easy-to-find ingredients - Celery, cucumber, lemon, and fennel are available year-round in most grocery stores.
    • More greens, made easy - A simple and refreshing way to enjoy the benefits of fresh green vegetables.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Plain celery juice is pretty bitter for most people, but a juice blend like this with celery and cucumber tastes wonderful.

    Ingredients for a green juice with celery, cucumber, lemon, green apple, and fennel.
    • Cucumber - For juicing, use almost any variety of dark green cucumber. English cucumbers (also called hothouse, seedless, and burpless cucumbers), flavorful little Persian cucumbers, or regular field and American cucumbers all work - and use the peel too!
    • Celery - Choose fresh, crisp celery with no browning. Celery heads vary in size by season, so the amount you need may vary.
    • Lemon - Meyer lemons are lovely if you have them, but regular lemons work perfectly. The juice and rind add a bright lift of flavor.
    • Apple - A tart green apple, such as Granny Smith, is best for juicing because it adds flavor without too much sweetness.
    • Fennel - Fennel is terrific in green juice. Its light licorice flavor becomes subtle and fresh when juiced, and you can use the bulb, stalks, and fronds. Fennel also contains anethole, a phytonutrient studied for anti-inflammatory benefits.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements.

    And for the best juice, be sure to buy organic produce, especially organic celery and organic cucumbers as they are often on the EWG's Dirty Dozen List, a great list to use when shopping.

    Chef's Tip: Leave Some Lemon Peel On
    If using Meyer lemons or thin-skinned organic lemons, leave some of the peel on when juicing. Lemon peel contains aromatic citrus oils, including d-limonene, the compound that gives citrus its bright fragrance. It adds fresh flavor and is studied for antioxidant and anti-inflammatory benefits. For thicker-skinned grocery store lemons, use only a small strip of peel or remove most of it to avoid bitterness. Wash lemons well before juicing.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • No fennel - Skip it and use more cucumber.
    • Lemon or lime - Swap lime for lemon if you prefer.
    • Add herbs - Add half a bunch of Italian parsley or cilantro for extra green flavor.
    • Lower sugar option - If you're watching natural sugar or have blood sugar concerns, use half the apple and save the rest for your next juice.
    • Add ginger - Add a small piece of fresh ginger for a spicy, warming kick.

    For another healthy green juice recipe try this cabbage juice.

    How to Make Cucumber Celery Juice

    Washing fruit and vegetables for juicing in a wire silver basket.
    Step 1: Wash all of your produce well, use a produce wash such as the one I use. Do not peel the cucumbers, there is a lot of nutrition in the skin.
    A glass bowl of chopped vegetables, apples and lemon.
    Step 2: Ready your produce by chopping according to the brands directions.
    A juicer processing green vegetables and fruit into a green juice.
    Ste 3: Process the juice by alternating your ingredients. Skim or strain foam and enjoy fresh juice or bottle it.

    For another terrific recipe with cucumber, try this cucumber salad with feta and mint. it's super refreshing and easy to make.

    Chef's tip: Green Juices. Green juice can be a terrific addition to a healthy diet, especially when you want to add more vegetables to your day. Juicing does not replace eating whole fruits and vegetables; it's a bonus. We still need whole produce for fiber, texture, and fullness, while fresh vegetable juices offer a concentrated serving of plant nutrients and phytonutrients.

    A large pitcher with a batch of fresh green vegetable juice.

    Serving Suggestions

    I love cucumber celery juice right out of the machine at room temperature, but it is still fantastic after refrigerating.

    Fresh fruit and vegetable juice is best consumed within 15-20 minutes after pressing, and on an empty stomach if possible for the fastest assimilation. If you store it in glass bottles or jars filled to the very top with no air gap and sealed with an airtight lid, they can last up to 24 hours. Some juicers allow you to make juices up to 72 hours ahead with minimal nutritional loss.

    Chef's Tip: What Kind of Juicer Works Best?
    For cucumber celery juice and other fresh vegetable juices, the three common juicer types are centrifugal, cold-press masticating, and twin gear juicers. All can make good juice, but masticating and twin gear juicers generally handle fibrous vegetables such as celery and fennel best. They're more of an investment, so if you're new to juicing, starting with a less expensive juicer is a good way to see how often you'll use it before upgrading.

    Glasses of bright green, healthy cucumber, celery vegetables juice.

    For a juicer that stabilizes juices for up to 72 hours (so you can juice a few days at a time) check out this juicer from Tribest. It is what I use most of the time. It's always on the best juicers list. When buying vegetables for juicing, be sure to buy organic. 

    More Juicing Recipes

    • A glass of bright green cabbage juice on a brown cutting board with vegetable bowl behind.
      Cabbage Juice
    • carrot celery morning glow juice
      Carrot Ginger Juice Recipe
    • glass of deep ruby red beet juice with vegetables behind.
      Beet Juice Recipe
    • watermelon cucumber juice
      Watermelon Cucumber Juice

    If You Make Cucumber Celery Juice

    If you make this juice, please comment and let me know how you enjoyed it. I love hearing from you and your comments help others readers as well. Thanks for supporting my site.

    📖 Recipe

    Glasses of bright green, healthy cucumber, celery vegetables juice.

    Cucumber Celery Juice

    Sally Cameron
    Cucumber celery green juice with fennel, lemon, and green apple is a refreshing change-up to your usual green juice recipe. Use the fennel bulb, tops and fronds all for juicing for a no waste solution. Wash your produce when you get home from shopping to be ready to juice. 
    5 from 3 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 10 minutes mins
    Total Time 10 minutes mins
    Course Juice
    Cuisine American
    Servings 2 yield 32-36 ounces
    Calories 129 kcal

    Equipment

    • Optimally an electric juicer this is the one I use

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 ½ heads celery about 14 stalks or ribs
    • 1 English cucumber or 3-4 Persian cucumbers or 2 field cucumbers - do not peel them.
    • 1 small fennel bulb
    • 1 Granny Smith apple
    • 1 small lemon

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Chop vegetables according to the directions of your juicers manual. Core the apple and discard the seeds.
    • Chop the fennel into smaller pieces as it is a hard vegetable. Cut the lemon into quarters. Process according to the juicers directions and enjoy. 
      If there is any pulp in your juice, either enjoy it as is with a little pulp or strain it in a fine strainer or sieve.

    Notes

    Bottling tip. If you're a little short on juice when you cap your glass bottles or mason jar, add a little filtered cold water to make up the difference so there is no air gap. This reduces oxidation and preserves nutrition.
    • Leave some rind on the lemon as it's a terrific source of d-limonene. Being an antioxidant, d-limonene is anti-inflammatory plus it supports detoxification of the liver. See the post for more information.
    • To reduce natural  sugar, use half an apple and save the other for your next juice. 
    • Add half a bunch of either Italian parsley or cilantro (a great detoxing herb).
    • Another delicious addition is a small knob of fresh raw ginger. Don't over do it as it can be spicy!
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 129kcalCarbohydrates: 33gProtein: 4gFat: 1gSaturated Fat: 0.2gPolyunsaturated Fat: 0.4gMonounsaturated Fat: 0.1gSodium: 95mgPotassium: 1007mgSugar: 18gVitamin A: 1310IUVitamin C: 65mgCalcium: 126mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Hawaiian Salad With Goat Cheese

    04/16/2011 by Sally Cameron 13 Comments

    Color Hawaiian salad with tomatoes, avocado, pineapple, beets. macadamia nuts and more in a bowl with utensils.

    Say aloha to boring salads with this colorful Hawaiian salad. Inspired by dinner at one of Hawaii's most famous dining spots, I couldn't wait to recreate it at home and share it with you. Featuring fresh greens, creamy goat cheese, tropical pineapple, beets, crisp cucumbers, and sweet tomatoes, it's dressed with a champagne vinaigrette. If you're ready to change up the usual Hawaiian fruit salad to something better, try this terrific Hawaiian-inspired salad recipe.

    A large round salad bowl filled with greens, tomatoes, beets, pineapple, goat cheese, cucumber, macadamia nuts and avocado.

    If you search for a Hawaiian salad recipe you'll find many different options from a Hawaiian mac salad (a pasta salad) or a Hawaiian chicken salad, to the famous sugar-laden Hawaiian ambrosia salad (a creamy fruit salad) often made with fake food cool whip, sour cream, mini marshmallows, mandarin oranges, and maraschino cherries (and about 50 grams of sugar per serving). To be fair, some recipes use Greek yogurt.

    It's just too unhealthy with all of that sugar. For a delicious, healthier Hawaiian salad, try this recipe.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Salad

    • It's sweet, savory, tangy, and crisp all in a bowl.
    • Enjoy the goat cheese or omit for vegan/dairy-free.
    • It's a way healthier, tastier option than your typical Hawaiian salad.

    Hawaiian Salad Ingredients

    Ingredients for a Hawaiian salad with salad greens, tomatoes, goat cheese, pineapple, cucumbers, beets, and vinaigrette.

    For the salad

    • Lettuce: Heads of fresh red lettuce, or buy pre-washed mixed spring greens.
    • Tomatoes: Small cherry tomatoes or grape tomatoes, red or mixed colors.
    • Pineapple: Either buy a small fresh pineapple to cut up yourself or buy already cut pineapple chunks or spears available in the refrigerated produce section. Use it fresh or grill it.
    • Cucumber: Use the small, crisp Persian cucumbers, mini cucumbers, or an English cucumber.
    • Beets: I use the deep red-purple beets for more color contrast but golden beets work too. Roast your own beets (directions below) or get a package of the steamed ready-to-eat beets.
    • Avocado: I've added avocado to the salad just because I love avocado! You can use it or leave it out. Buy one that is ripe and ready to cut, or if rock hard wait a few days for it to ripen.
    • Goat cheese: Get a small package or log of "chevre" which is fresh goat cheese and crumble it yourself. It's soft and tangy, a little tart and totally delicious. Pre-crumbled goat cheese works too.
    • Green onions: A sprinkle of finely chopped green onions or chives adds color, flavor, and a nice finishing touch.
    • Avocado: A nice buttery creamy addition (optional).

    Champagne vinaigrette

    A light champagne vinaigrette lets the salad flavors shine and compliments without overpowering.

    • Oil: Here's the place for a good extra virgin olive oil.
    • Vinegar: Champagne vinegar makes a lovely light vinaigrette, alternatives below.
    • Egg yolk: Raw egg yolk makes the vinaigrette a little creamy as it emulsifies the dressing (optional, it's a good trick).
    • Garlic: Use a fresh clove for it's pungent sharp flavor. A fresh garlic clove, or use the puree in the tube.
    • Shallot: Adds a little sharp-sweet flavor and texture to the vinaigrette. Optional but such a nice addition.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements and seasonings.

    For another terrific summer salad with fruit, try this refreshing watermelon basil salad with feta cheese.

    Substitutions and Variations

    Using these substitutions change the salad a bit but all of them taste great and work well.

    • Swap Greek feta for the goat cheese.
    • Use an unseasoned rice vinegar in place of the champagne vinegar, or use red wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar.
    • If using raw egg yolk concerns you (it is usually safe as long as your eggs are fresh and un-cracked), just omit it and add a little creamy Dijon mustard to help emulsify the vinaigrette and add flavor. You can add it even if you are using the yolk.
    • To add a nice buttery crunch, add unsalted Hawaiian macadamia nuts (here is what I buy). 
    • Skip the green onion and add slivers of red onion for more color. 

    For another vinaigrette that works with the Hawaiian salad, try the lemon vinaigrette recipe with this lentil and quinoa salad.

    Chef's tip: How to roast beets. Trim beet greens to 1" and scrub clean. Pre-heat oven to 400°F. Place beets in a double layer of heavy foil, sprinkle with oil, salt and pepper. Fold up foil to create a package and roast until beets are tender when pierced through, about 45 minutes. For full directions and how to skin beets, please see this post on how to roast beets.

    Love a good Greek salad? Try this one with leafy greens, Greek feta, olives, tomatoes, cucumbers and a terrific Greek vinaigrette.

    How to Make the Salad

    Hawaiian salad ingredients prepped and ready to toss together for serving.
    1. Start by making the vinaigrette. Whisk the vinaigrette ingredients in a small bowl until smooth. For making a larger quantity of dressing, add ingredients to a blender and blend briefly on low speed until smooth and emulsified.
    2. For the salad, wash and dry your salad greens. A salad spinner makes it easy!
    3. Halve the tomatoes, cube the pineapple, slice or chop the cucumbers, crumble the goat cheese. Wait to slice the avocado until before serving so it does not oxidize (turn brown).

    To prepare Hawaiian salad in advance, wash and dry your lettuce leaves and ready each of the components. Keep them refrigerated individually in an airtight container separately.

    Save dicing the avocado for just before serving so it does not oxidize (turn brown). Ready a large bowl and salad serving utensils. When you're ready to serve it goes together like a breeze!

    Pineapple Tips

    Chunks of golden yellow pineapple in an air fryer with browned edges.

    Pineapple for the Hawaiian salad can be enjoyed raw or cooked, grilled on a gas grill, a grill pan indoors, briefly broiled, or in an air fryer at 400° for about 5 minutes shaking the basket half the way through.

    Chop and toss or brush with a few drops of olive oil or neutral oil to prevent sticking. Alternatively you can cook them as spears and chop them after cooking or grilling.

    Colorful Hawaiian salad with fresh greens, pineapple, tomatoes, beets, and goat cheese in a white bowl.

    For a fruit salad recipe that's colorful and healthy without added sugar, try this fresh fruit salad recipe. It's easily varied by swapping a few of the fruit options for tropical options or seasonally what's best at the store.

    Salad Serving Suggestions

    Make the vinaigrette, toss the greens in a large bowl with a little vinaigrette to start and add the goodies. Serve extra dressing on the side. This is a wonderful salad for family gatherings because of all of the vibrant colors. It looks beautiful arranged on a big platter or large bowl.

    Serve it as a side salad or add grilled chicken, rotisserie chicken, or shrimp for more of a main course salad.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I add tropical fruits other than pineapple?

    For a Hawaiian salad variation, try adding different fresh tropical fruit such as kiwi fruit, a little mango, passion fruit, guava, or papaya adding tropical color and sweetness. Avocado is another you might not think (yes it is actually a fruit) but they too are grown in Hawaii's fertile volcanic soil.

    What protein works best in a Hawaiian salad?

    Adding protein makes a Hawaiian salad a complete meal. Grilled chicken and shrimp work well. For plant-based diets, try a little tempeh or firm grilled tofu. For another seafood option often served in Hawaii, try mahi mahi filets.

    What nuts are best to use in a Hawaiian salad?

    Grown in Hawaii since the 1800's, macadamia nuts are the classic nut to add to a Hawaiian salad. Another nut grown in Hawaii is the cashew, both delicious options for aHawaiian salad.

    More Fresh Salad Recipes

    Here are more ideas for salads to jazz up your salad routine. And if you're looking for salads with beans, grains, or veggies, check out the Salads Recipe page.

    • Tomato and cucumber salad, with red onion, feta, and garbanzo beans with greek dressing.
      Cucumber Tomato and Feta Salad (Greek Salad)
    • spinach salad with pomegranate
      Pomegranate and Spinach Salad
    • leafy green and berry salad
      Strawberry Goat Cheese Salad

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this Hawaiian salad, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    Color Hawaiian salad with tomatoes, avocado, pineapple, beets. macadamia nuts and more in a bowl with utensils.

    Hawaiian Salad Recipe with Goat Cheese

    Sally Cameron
    This brightly colored Hawaiian style salad is fresh tasting and healthy, inspired by Merriman's Restaurant on the Big Island of Hawaii. To make it a main course, add more salad greens and add grilled chicken or shrimp. For dairy-free, skip the cheese. Buy pre-cooked beets or roast your own (takes about 40 minutes, do ahead). Macadamia nuts are a nice add too.
    4.41 from 5 votes
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 15 minutes mins
    Total Time 15 minutes mins
    Course Salad
    Cuisine Hawaiian
    Servings 4
    Calories 485 kcal

    Ingredients
      

    To Roast the Beets (or buy pre-cooked to save time)

    • 2 medium red beets or other color
    • 2 teaspoons olive oil
    • ⅛ teaspoon salt
    • ⅛ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Hawaiian Salad

    • 1 large head crisp red lettuce or 5-6 ounce container pre-washed lettuce
    • 12-16 sweet grape tomatoes halved lengthwise
    • 4 small spears fresh pineapple diced
    • 1 small English cucumber or 3-4 mini cucumbers chopped
    • 1 ripe avocado split, seeded, quartered then diced
    • 4-6 ounces goat cheese crumbled

    Champagne Vinaigrette

    • 6 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 2 tablespoons champagne vinegar or white wine vinegar
    • 1 large egg yolk optional
    • 1 small garlic clove finely chopped or zested
    • 2 teaspoons finely chopped shallot optional
    • 2 pinches sea salt
    • 2 pinches ground black pepper

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    To roast your own beets (do ahead of time and chill)

    • Pre-heat the oven to 425 degrees. Trim the tops off the beets to about 1 inch. Wash and dry the beets and place on a double piece of heavy foil. Toss the beets with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper.
      Wrap the beets up in the foil and place the packet on the center rack in the oven. Roast until beets are easily pierced with the tip of a thin skewer like a cake tester or a paring knife, about 40 minutes depending on the size.
      Remove beet packet from the oven and cool until you can handle them. With paper towels, rub the skins off of the beets; quarter them and set aside. Chill the beets then cut into pieces.
      Note - Wear disposable food handler gloves while working with the beets to prevent staining your hands.

    Make the vinaigrette (makes extra)

    • While the beets are roasting, make the vinaigrette. Whisk oil, vinegar, yolk, garlic and shallot together in a small bowl until creamy, or shake well in a jar with a tight lid. Season with salt and pepper.
      If vinaigrette is made ahead of time, refrigerate until serving due to the raw egg yolk. Re-whisk if needed.

    Assemble the Salad

    • Serve the salad family style in one large bowl or on individual plates.
      For family style, toss the greens with a little of the vinaigrette, add to a large bowl and add the cucumber, tomatoes, beets, avocado, pineapple, and goat cheese. Serve extra vinaigrette on the side.

    Notes

    Vinaigrette note:
    If using a raw egg yolk concerns you, omit it from the vinaigrette, but it does make it nice and creamy. If the egg is fresh and un-cracked, you should have no worries. Dressing with raw yolk is good for 2 days (only) refrigerated.
    Another option is use Dijon mustard to emulsify the dressing. Add about 1 teaspoon and whisk well until creamy. 
    The nutrition calculation includes all of the vinaigrette so it is not accurate.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 485kcalCarbohydrates: 31gProtein: 10gFat: 38gSaturated Fat: 9gPolyunsaturated Fat: 4gMonounsaturated Fat: 24gCholesterol: 59mgSodium: 450mgPotassium: 855mgFiber: 8gSugar: 19gVitamin A: 1296IUVitamin C: 72mgCalcium: 97mgIron: 2mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Greek Dressing Recipe (Greek Vinaigrette)

    06/09/2026 by Sally Cameron 1 Comment

    Golden creamy Greek salad dressing in a glass jar on a counter.

    This Greek dressing recipe is a tangy, bright vinaigrette made with olive oil, red wine vinegar and lemon juice, garlic, Dijon, and oregano. It's the classic dressing for Greek salad, but it's simple enough to make in minutes and keep in the refrigerator for easy meals all week.

    Golden creamy Greek salad dressing in a glass jar on a counter.

    I keep a jar of Greek salad dressing on hand to drizzle over green salads, cucumber tomato salad, grilled chicken, seafood, grain bowls, roasted vegetables, or Greek potato salad. For a creamy variation, whisk in a little Greek yogurt for extra tang and body.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Greek Dressing Recipe Snapshot

    • Bright and tangy - Olive oil, vinegar, lemon, garlic, and oregano make a classic Greek vinaigrette.
    • Ready in minutes - Whisk, shake in a jar, or blend.
    • Great all week - Keep a jar in the fridge for salads, bowls, and grilled proteins.
    • Easy to customize - Add Greek yogurt for a creamy version.

    Where I use this dressing? For my Cucumber tomato and feta salad.

    Ingredients You'll Need

    Olive oil, lemon juice, vinegar, garlic, mustard, oregano for a Greek salad dressing in prep bowls
    • Oil - Extra virgin olive oil is best. Greek Koroneiki olive oil is especially good here.
    • Vinegar - Red wine vinegar is classic for Greek dressing.
    • Lemon juice - Adds extra brightness and fresh acidity.
    • Mustard - Just a little Dijon helps emulsify the dressing.
    • Garlic - Adds a bold savory punch.
    • Herbs - Dried oregano is classic and gives the dressing its Mediterranean flavor.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements, salt and pepper.

    Substitutions and Variations

    • Make it creamy - Whisk in 1-2 tablespoons plain Greek yogurt.
    • Use fresh herbs - Add chopped fresh parsley, dill, or mint just before serving.
    • Soften the garlic - Use garlic powder for a milder dressing.

    How to Make Greek Dressing

    Greek dressing is simple to make. Add the olive oil, red wine vinegar, lemon juice, garlic, Dijon, oregano, salt and pepper to a jar and shake well, or whisk everything together in a bowl. For the smoothest, best-emulsified Greek salad dressing, blend it briefly in a blender. This is my favorite method.

    A jar of Greek vinaigrette dressing shaken to combine.

    Want another go-to dressing? Try my French vinaigrette-quick, classic, and great on almost any salad.

    Serving Suggestions

    Make this Greek dressing ahead so it's always ready to serve.

    • Greek salad - Use it as the dressing for a classic Greek salad with tomatoes, cucumber, red onion, and feta.
    • Green salads - Drizzle over any simple green salad to add big flavor fast.
    • Greek potato salad - Perfect for warm potatoes and herbs (no mayo needed).
    • Grilled chicken, salmon, or shrimp - Spoon over as a finishing sauce right off the grill.
    • Roasted vegetables - Drizzle over warm veggies for a quick flavor boost.
    • Grain bowls or rice bowls - Use it as the sauce to tie everything together.
    • Quick marinade - Great for chicken, shrimp, or vegetables before grilling (reserve a little fresh dressing for serving).

    Once you've got this Greek vinaigrette down, my homemade Italian dressing is a great next one to add to your rotation.

    Storage

    Store Greek dressing in a sealed jar in the refrigerator for 5-7 days. Shake well before using as vinaigrettes naturally separate. For the creamy yogurt version, use within 3-4 days.

    Tomato and cucumber salad, with red onion, feta, and garbanzo beans with greek dressing.

    More Salad Dressing Recipes

    Keep a few homemade dressings in the refrigerator to make salads, bowls, grilled proteins, and vegetables easy all week. Many also work as marinades.

    • A bowl of homemade caesar dressing with spoon.
      Caesar Salad Dressing Without Anchovies
    • Golden Italian salad dressing in a jar with a silver whisk.
      Easy Homemade Italian Dressing
    • Easy Green Goddess Dip (and Dressing)
    • creamy tahini salad dressing
      Creamy Lemon Tahini Salad Dressing

    If You Make This Greek Dressing Recipe

    Please leave a comment and let me know how you served it and enjoyed it. I love hearing from you, and your comments help other readers too! Thanks for supporting my site.

    📖 Recipe

    Golden creamy Greek salad dressing in a glass jar on a counter.

    Greek Dressing Recipe

    Sally Cameron
    This Greek dressing recipe is bright, tangy, and ready in minutes. Use it for Greek salad, bowls, grilled chicken, vegetables, and easy meals all week.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Cook Time 0 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course dresssing, vinaigrette
    Cuisine Greek
    Servings 12 Yield ¾ cup
    Calories 82 kcal

    Equipment

    • A jar to shake the dressing

    Ingredients
      

    • ½ cup good extra virgin olive oil
    • 2 tablespoons red wine vinegar
    • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
    • 2 garlic cloves minced or microplaned
    • 1 teaspoon smooth Dijon mustard
    • ½ teaspoon dried oregano
    • ¼ teaspoon fine sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Add the olive oil, red wine vinegar, lemon juice, garlic, Dijon, oregano, salt and pepper to a jar and shake well, or whisk everything together in a bowl. For the smoothest, best-emulsified Greek salad dressing, blend it briefly in a blender.
      Greek dressing keeps for up to 5 days in an airtight container in the refrigerator. For the best flavor, let it sit at room temperature for a few minutes to take the chill off before serving.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1tablespoonCalories: 82kcalCarbohydrates: 0.5gProtein: 0.1gFat: 9gSaturated Fat: 1gPolyunsaturated Fat: 1gMonounsaturated Fat: 7gSodium: 54mgPotassium: 8mgFiber: 0.1gSugar: 0.1gVitamin A: 2IUVitamin C: 1mgCalcium: 3mgIron: 0.1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!

    Strawberry Yogurt Smoothie with Banana

    07/07/2017 by Sally Cameron Leave a Comment

    Strawberry banana smoothie in a glass.

    Red ripe strawberries and banana plus tangy yogurt make delicious partners in this strawberry yogurt smoothie. A quick breakfast and great way start your day, refuel after a workout, or perfect as an after school snack. Use fresh strawberries or frozen strawberries for year round smoothies adding your favorite yogurt. Takes just a minute to blend and enjoy!

    A glass of strawberry banana yogurt smoothie topped with a fresh red strawberry.

    Strawberry and banana is a classic smoothie combination. Here, I've added yogurt to give it creamy texture and a healthy amount of protein. It's one of the most popular smoothie combinations and highly customizable to meet your nutritional needs. If you've never tried a strawberry yogurt smoothie, it's a great one to add to your smoothie recipe file.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You'll Like This Recipe

    • Simple ingredients are easy to keep on hand.
    • Use fresh fruit or frozen fruit and plain yogurt.
    • Easy to customize for a healthy breakfast.
    • A nice twist on a classic strawberry banana smoothie recipe.

    Another great breakfast option is this overnight oats with chia seeds. Top them with strawberries and bananas!

    Smoothie Ingredients

    Strawberries, banana, milk, and yogurt on the counter for a smoothie.
    • Milk: Dairy milk or non-dairy milk, there are so many options. Use your favorite milk.
    • Strawberries: For a frosty smoothie, use frozen strawberries. Easy to always have on hand in the freezer. When in season, fresh ripe strawberries work too but the smoothie may be a little more fluid.
    • Banana: Use either fresh banana or frozen banana. You can slice and freeze your own in chunks. To minimize sugar, use a greenish banana (or use less) versus a ripe banana.
    • Yogurt: Greek yogurt gives you higher protein per serving than regular yogurt. Plain Greek yogurt is the best option as the flavored ones (even vanilla yogurt) have a lot of added sugar you don't need. Be sure to check the labels before buying. If you want vanilla, add your own. Note below.

    Please see the recipe card for measurements and quantities.

    Here's another delicious smoothie recipe (I've been drinking for 25 years), my creamy raspberry smoothie. 

    Chef's tip: What's the best milk for smoothies? The one that works best for you that you enjoy. Try homemade almond milk, oat milk, quick homemade hemp milk, homemade coconut milk, or even cashew milk. If you prefer, use whole milk or low fat (dairy) .

    Smoothie Options and Variations

    • Add ground flaxseed: Flaxseed adds high quality fat and fiber to smoothies. I grind mine fresh in a little inexpensive spice grinder, or buy it already ground. Start with a tablespoon.
    • Add chia seeds for a thicker smoothie, start with a teaspoon or two. 
    • Sweetener: Try berry flavored stevia drops or a monk fruit simple syrup to keep sugar down. Honey is another easy option to add natural sweetness. Use either a mild raw honey or a no-sugar honey like this (it's what I use).
    • For high protein: Use more yogurt, or add a half scoop of protein powder of choice.
    • For a vegan smoothie: Use a plant-based yogurt, but as vegan yogurts have little protein (they are mostly fat), you'll need to add a plant-based protein powder to get protein, or try adding hemp seeds. This is a non-dairy option too.
    • Vanilla: Vanilla adds nice flavor so try a little vanilla extract or vanilla paste if desired.

    Chef's tip: Be sure to buy organic, as conventional strawberries have high levels of pesticide residue.  Strawberries are always on the Dirty Dozen list and often the number one worst offender.

    strawberries | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Recipe Instructions

    Strawberry banana smoothie ingredients in a blender with milk.
    Step 1: Add your milk to the blender first, then add the fruit, yogurt, and any options if using.
    Beautiful pink strawberry smoothie with yogurt and bananas ready to drink.
    Step 2: Blend until smooth. Thickness will depend on your milk, yogurt, and whether fruit is fresh or frozen.

    Serving Suggestions

    Smoothies are good right out of the blender but generally hold well if you need to make them ahead for a grab-and-go breakfast. Stir or shake if needed after it sits.

    This strawberry yogurt smoothie is a meal for most people. If you want to serve it as part of a larger breakfast or as a snack, use it as two servings and serve it in smaller glasses. For younger kids, half a smoothie may be enough.

    Need a little something else to go with it? Try these strawberry muffins made with fresh strawberries.

    strawberry banana smoothie | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Recipe FAQs

    Are strawberry yogurt smoothies healthy?

    It depends on how you make them. Strawberry yogurt smoothies can be healthy or sugar bombs unless you watch the ingredients. For a healthy smoothie, don't over-do the amount of fruit and choose plain unsweetened yogurt to reduce sugar. Another option, try a non-dairy milk. If you're using banana, use just half a banana and choose a greenish banana for less sugar. Green bananas are also a good source of something called resistant starch, which the friendly bacteria in your gut loves. If sweetening, use either monk fruit or stevia to keep the sugar down. 

    How can I make a vegan strawberry yogurt smoothie

    For a vegan strawberry yogurt smoothie, use a vegan yogurt. Be aware that vegan yogurts are mostly fat (such as those made with coconut milk) and very little protein. To get your protein in, add a plant-based protein powder.

    How can I make my smoothie sweeter or less sweet?

    For a sweeter smoothie, add a little natural sweetener such as honey or maple syrup. To add sweetness without sugar, use monk fruit (powdered or simple syrup) or stevia (the flavored liquid drops are nice).

    For a less sweet smoothie, evaluate your ingredients. Try less of sweet fruits, and if using banana, cut it down to half a banana and use a greenish banana because they have less sugar. If using yogurt, choose a plain, unsweetened yogurt and skip the flavored varieties which tend to have a lot of sugar added.

    More Smoothie Recipes!

    Have a smoothie lover in your house? Here's more new recipes to try. From berries and mango to avocado and chocolate. And if a green smoothie is your thing, try this tropical green detox smoothie. For a really creamy smoothie, try the green tea and avocado smoothie.

    • two chocolate smoothies in glasses on an antique tray.
      Chocolate Banana Smoothie
    • Healthy Smoothies.
      The Ultimate Guide to Making Healthy Smoothies
    • Tropical Mango Green Smoothie
      Green Smoothie Recipe with Mango
    • A glass dairy bottle of homemade almond milk with raw almonds on a wooden table.
      How to Make Homemade Almond Milk

    ⭐️Did you Make This Recipe?

    If you make this strawberry yogurt smoothie, please add your comment. I appreciate your feedback and enjoy hearing from you. If you loved it, please give it a 5-star rating! They really help other readers.

    📖 Recipe

    strawberry banana smoothie | AFoodCentricLife.com

    Strawberry Yogurt Smoothie

    Sally Cameron
    Use frozen strawberries for a frosty cool smoothie or fresh. For bananas, choose greenish bananas for less sugar. Greek yogurt provides more protein than regular.
    5 from 1 vote
    Prevent your screen from going dark
    Print Recipe Pin Recipe
    Prep Time 5 minutes mins
    Total Time 5 minutes mins
    Course Beverage, Breakfast, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Servings 1 serving
    Calories 248 kcal

    Equipment

    • blender

    Ingredients
      

    • 1 cup unsweetened almond milk or dairy milk or milk of choice
    • 5 ounces plain unsweetened Greek yogurt or regular yogurt
    • 4 ounces strawberries, fresh or frozen 4-5 whole strawberries
    • ½ dropper full berry flavored stevia drops sub honey or monk fruit
    • 1 small banana greenish ones have less sugar

    Would you like to save this recipe?

    Never lose a recipe! We'll email this post to you, so you can come back to it later.

    Instructions
     

    • Add all ingredients to a high powered blender starting with the milk. Blend until smooth.

    Notes

      • To reduce sugar, use half of a small banana, and make it a greenish one, not a fully ripe one. That will reduce by about 6 grams of sugar. 
      • Add ground flaxseed: Flaxseed adds high quality fat and fiber to smoothies. I grind mine fresh in a little inexpensive spice grinder, or buy it already ground. Start with a tablespoon.
      • Sweetener: A dropper full berry flavored stevia drops works great, or use a keto simply syrup to keep sugar down and add sweetness. Honey is another easy option. Use either a mild raw honey or a no-sugar honey like this (it's what I use).
      • Protein powder: Protein powder is an option instead of yogurt for a no-dairy strawberry banana smoothie, or combine them to get the level of protein and creaminess you want.
      • Vanilla: Vanilla adds nice flavor so try a little vanilla extract or vanilla paste if desired.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 248kcalCarbohydrates: 38gProtein: 18gFat: 4gSaturated Fat: 0.3gPolyunsaturated Fat: 2gMonounsaturated Fat: 2gTrans Fat: 0.01gCholesterol: 7mgSodium: 378mgPotassium: 735mgFiber: 6gSugar: 23gVitamin A: 84IUVitamin C: 75mgCalcium: 481mgIron: 1mg
    Tried this recipe?Let us know how it was with a comment and leave a star rating!
    • 1
    • 2
    • 3
    • …
    • 10
    • Next Page »
    Chef Sally Cameron of aFoodcentricLife.com in her kitchen.

    Welcome! I'm Sally, a professionally trained chef, former personal chef and caterer, lover of fresh healthy food, and sharing it with others.

    More about me →

    Best Summer Recipes

    • Sliced of golden pound cake with strawberries and a small bowl of whipped cream.
      Gluten Free Pound Cake with Cream Cheese
    • A glass jar of deep red homemade bbq sauce.
      Gluten-Free BBQ Sauce Recipe
    • BBQ glazed smoked pork tenderloin sliced on a gray platter for serving.
      Smoked Pork Tenderloin (pellet grill)
    • A bowl of slow cooker pinto beans topped with jalapeno slices, cilantro, and chopped white onion.
      Crock Pot Pinto Beans

    More Recipe Ideas

    • Grilled chicken kabobs glazed with hoisin sauce on a baking sheet.
      Grilled Hoisin Chicken Skewers
    • Broccoli bacon salad
      Crunchy Broccoli Salad with Bacon
    • Gluten-free pasta salad with tomatoes, cucumber, pine nuts, herbs, and more.
      Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe
    • Sliced flank steak on a cutting board with flank steak marinade in a small bowl.
      Carne Asada Marinade (for Grilled Steak)

    Best Summer Recipes -->

    Footer

    as seen on

    Logos of Featured Publications

    About

    • Privacy Policy
    • Disclaimer
    • Terms & Conditions
    • Accessibility policy

    Newsletter

    • Sign Up! for emails and recipes.

    Menu

    • Home
    • About
    • Contact
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • Pinterest

    As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

    Copyright © 2026 aFoodcentricLife.com

    Rate This Recipe

    Your vote:




    A rating is required
    A name is required
    An email is required